jefferson county school district r-1€¦ · 01 73 29 cutting and patching 1 – 2 . 01 74 00...

JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT R-1

KITCHEN DOOR REPLACEMENT

April 1, 2013

PROJECT MANUAL

Christiansen, Reece and Partners, P.C. 100 East St. Vrain Street, Suite 300

Colorado Springs, CO 80903

1

PROJECT MANUAL

TABLE OF CONTENTS

JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT R-1 KITCHEN DOOR REPLACEMENT

APRIL 1, 2013

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00 11 16 Invitation to Bid 1 – 2 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 1 – 6 00 30 00 Bid Proposal Form 1 – 2 00 31 00 Information Available to Bidders 1 00 41 00 Form Samples 1

Bid Bond 1 Performance Bond 1 – 3 Labor and Material Payment Bond 1 – 2 Insurance Requirements 1 Criminal Records Check Certification 1 Construction Agreement (Sample) 1 - 4

00 72 00 General Conditions of the Contract 1 – 41 SPECIFICATIONS AND PROJECT REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 11 00 Summary of Work 1 – 3 01 14 00 Work Restrictions 1 01 31 19 Project Meetings 1 – 2 01 33 00 Submittals 1 – 5 01 35 16 Alteration Project Procedures 1 – 5 01 35 53 Security Procedures 1 – 2 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements 1 01 42 13 Abbreviations and Symbols 1 – 2 01 42 19 Reference Standards 1 01 45 00 Quality Control 1 – 2 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 1 – 3 01 60 00 Product Requirements 1 – 4 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching 1 – 2 01 74 00 Cleaning & Waste Management 1 01 77 00 Contract Closeout Procedures 1 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals 1 – 4 DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 Selective Structure Demolition 1 – 3 DIVISION 6 WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 1 – 3 DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal 1 – 3 07 92 00 Joint Sealers 1 – 5

2

DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08 11 00 Steel Doors and Frames 1 – 5 08 71 00 Door Hardware 1 – 16 08 81 00 Glazing 1 – 3 DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09 91 00 Painting 1 – 5 DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 28 05 00E Common Work Results for Electronic Life Safety 1 – 6 and Security (Exiting Systems) 28 13 00 Access Control Security System 1 – 14 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS Door Schedule 1 - 3 Door Elevations 1 /A0.1 Frame Elevations 2/A0.2 Door Swings 3/A0.3 Details A1 – A7 Work Description 1 – 26 PROJECT LOCATIONS Adams Elementary School Allendale Elementary School Arvada K-8 School Belmar Elementary School Bergen Meadow Elementary School Bergen Valley Elementary School Blue Heron Elementary School Bradford Primary School Campbell Elementary School Carmody Middle School Columbine Hills Elementary School Creighton Middle School Deane Elementary School Deer Creek Middle School Dutch Creek Elementary School Edgewater Elementary School Eiber Elementary School Elk Creek Elementary School Falcon Bluffs Middle School Fitzmorris Elementary School Foothills Elementary School Foster Elementary School Fremont Elementary School Glennon Heights Elementary School Governor’s Ranch Elementary School Green Mountain Elementary School Hackberry Hill Elementary School Hutchinson Elementary School Kendallvue Elementary School Kendrick Lakes Elementary School

Kullerstrand Elementary School Lasley Elementary School Lawrence Elementary School Lukas Elementary School Lumberg Elementary School Mandalay Middle School Maple Grove Elementary School Marshdale Elementary School Meiklejohn Elementary School Mitchell Elementary School Moore Middle School Mortensen Elementary School Mount Carbon Elementary School Normandy Elementary School North Arvada Middle School Oberon Middle School O’Connell Middle School Parmalee Elementary School Parr Elementary School Patterson Elementary School Peiffer Elementary School Pennington Elementary School Powderhorn Elementary School Prospect Valley Elementary School Red Rocks Elementary School Rooney Ranch Elementary School Ryan Elementary School Semper Elementary School Shelton Elementary School Sheridan Green Elementary School Sierra Elementary School

South Lakewood Elementary School Stein Elementary School Stevens Elementary School Stober Elementary School Stoney Creek Elementary School Stott Elementary School Summit Ridge Middle School Swanson Elementary School Swanson Elementary School Thomson Elementary School Ute Meadows Elementary School Van Arsdale Elementary School Vivian Elementary School Warder Elementary School Warren Tech School Welchester Elementary School West Jefferson Elementary School West Jefferson Middle School Westridge Elementary School West Woods Elementary School Wilmore-Davis Elementary School Wilmot Elementary School Witt Elementary School

00 11 16 - 1 Invitation for Bids

DOCUMENT 00 11 16

INVITATION FOR BIDS Sealed bids (single copy) will be received by Jefferson County School District R-1 in the Main Conference Room at the offices of Facilities Planning and Design/Construction Management, 809 Quail St., Bldg. #4, Lakewood, Colorado 80215, until:

2:00PM MDST April 19, 2013

for the furnishing of all labor, materials and services for completion of the KITCHEN DOOR REPLACEMENT project for, Jefferson County Schools, Colorado, at which time they will be opened and read aloud. Any bid received after the above stated time will be returned to the Bidder unopened. GENERAL CONTRACTORS The following General Contractors have been pre-qualified by the School District to bid the project: Bosco Constructors 6568 S. Racine Circle #100 Centennial, CO 8011 Phone: 303-799-1221 Email: [email protected] TC2 Construction 28540 Douglas Park Road Evergreen, CO 80439 Phone: 303-670-0084 Email: [email protected] WE O’Neil Construction 229 Vallejo Street Denver, CO 80223 Phone: 303-238-7900 Email: [email protected] Saunders Construction 6950 S. Jordan Road Centennial, CO 80112 Phone: 303-699-9000 Email: [email protected] Himmelman Construction 12560 W. Cedar Drive Lakewood, CO 80228 Phone: 303-790-1984 Email: [email protected]

mailto:[email protected]





00 11 16 - 2 Invitation for Bids

Bids received after the closing time will be returned unopened. Immediately after said closing time, all bids received will be publicly opened and read aloud in the presence of all interested parties. Beginning April 1, 2013, Contract Documents will be available. Complete sets of the Construction Documents, in pdf format, will be emailed to each General Contractor. Each bid must be submitted on the Bid Form, a specimen copy of which is enclosed in the documents. Each bid must be accompanied by a Bid Guaranty in the amount not less than TEN PERCENT (10%) of the TOTAL BID PRICE in the form of a Bid Surety Bond issued by a company rated not lower than A- in Best’s Insurance Guide, latest edition, or have a Best’s Financial Rating of at least Class A, cashier’s check, or certified check drawn on an acceptable bank and payable without qualification to Jefferson County School District R-1. Bids must be sealed and marked in a manner prescribed in the documents. Jefferson County School District R-1 reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive all irregularities, and to accept any bid deemed to be in its best interest. A Mandatory Pre-bid meeting for pre-qualified General Contractors, and all sub-contractor bidders, will be held at: 2:00PM MDST April 9, 2013 at the Facilities Planning and Design/Construction Management, 809 Quail St., Bldg. #4, Lakewood, Colorado 80215. Other interested sub-contractors are also invited to attend this meeting. Further information will be found in the “Instructions to Bidders” in the Contract Documents. Dated at Golden, Colorado BOARD OF EDUCATION JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. R-1 1829 DENVER WEST DRIVE, BUILDING #27 GOLDEN, COLORADO 80401

END OF SECTION

00 21 13 - 1 Instructions to Bidders

DOCUMENT 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Jefferson County School District No. R-1, State of Colorado, hereinafter called the “Owner”, has advertised for bids to be submitted for the construction work specified in the advertisement. Proposals to be entitled to consideration shall be in accordance with the following: 1. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DOCUMENTS Each Bidder shall visit the site of the proposed work and shall completely inform himself

relative to construction hazards, procedure, labor, and all other conditions and factors, local and otherwise, which would affect prosecution and completion of the work and its cost. Such considerations shall include, without limitations, the arrangement and condition of existing structures and facilities; the procedure necessary for maintenance of uninterrupted, safe operation, use and occupancy of existing facilities; the availability and cost of labor; and facilities for transportation, handling and storage of materials and equipment. All such factors shall be properly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid. Each bidder shall so fully examine the plans and specifications and acquaint himself with their requirements and with the conditions surrounding the construction on the site that he shall be fully familiar with and informed of all facilities, difficulties, and problems associated with or which might be incurred in the prosecution of the work. In case of disagreement between drawings and specifications or within either document itself, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be figured in the bid (see GC.6.04). It shall be the responsibility of the Bidder to direct the attention of the Architect and Owner in writing and at least seventy-two (72) hours prior to the time set for the opening of the bids, any seeming inconsistencies, ambiguous requirements, omissions, or any other matter which seems to require explanation, and to request clarification. The submission of a bid shall be taken as prima facie evidence of compliance with this requirement and as an acknowledgment that the Bidder has received all the required documents and has visited the site. There will be no subsequent financial adjustment for lack of such prior information.

2. INTERPRETATION No oral interpretations will be made by anyone to any Bidder as to the true meaning or

requirements of any part of the drawings, specifications or other proposed Contract Documents. Every request for an interpretation shall be made in writing via email or fax and received by the Architect and the Owner no later than 12:00 Noon on Monday, April 15, 2013. The person submitting the request shall be responsible for its prompt delivery. Questions received after that time will not be received and/or answered. Every interpretation made to a Bidder will be in the form of an addendum to the Contract Documents, which, if issued, will be sent as promptly as is practicable to all persons to whom drawings, specifications, and other proposed Contract Documents have been issued. All such addenda shall become part of the Contract Documents and their receipt shall be acknowledged in the Bid Proposal. The Owner will not be responsible for any other explanations or interpretations of the proposed Contract Documents.

3. BID FORMS

Bid forms will be supplied by the Owner. Proposals shall be made upon the forms provided. Attention is directed to the fact that the Contract Documents contain one complete set of bidding and contract forms; these are sample forms included for the information of Bidders. They are not to be detached from the Contract Documents, filled out or executed.


Special attention is directed to the Form of Bid Bond included in the bidding documents. Additional copies of this form may be secured from the Architect, but the use of this particular form is not mandatory. Any similar standard form of a recognized responsible surety which contains the same stipulations and guarantees, the same execution of the contract and indemnification of the Owner in case of default, will be acceptable.

4. PREPARATION OF BID FORMS All proposal forms must be prepared in single copy and in conformity with and be based

upon and submitted subject to all requirements of the Contract Documents. They must be fully completed with all blanks appropriately filled in. Each bid shall be legibly written or printed in ink on the separate form provided. No alterations in bids, or in the printed forms therefor, by erasures, interpolations, or otherwise will be acceptable unless each such alteration is signed or initialed by the Bidder; if initialed, the Owner may require the Bidder to identify any alteration so initialed. No alteration in any bid, or in the form on which it is submitted, shall be made after the bid has been submitted.

It will be the Bidder’s responsibility to secure any and all addenda from the Architect. The

Bidder will be required to acknowledge receipt of all addenda. Owner reserves the right to reject any bid which is received which has not been based upon all addenda issued by the Architect.

No Bidder may submit more than one bid. Multiple bids under different names will not be

accepted from one firm or association. The Bidder is required to bid on all alternates and complete all blanks on the bid form. If

alternates are called for on a type or method of construction as to which the Bidder does not desire to bid, he shall insert the words “NO BID”. In case the Bidder desires to bid on an alternate, he shall set forth in the space provided therefor, the amount to be added or deducted from the base bid or in the event that the Bidder does not desire to make a change from the base bid, he shall so indicate by using the words “NO CHANGE”. In the selection of alternates, the Owner reserves the right to select or reject any or all alternates in the proposal if, in the judgment of the Board of Education, or its designees, the best interest of the School District will be so served.

5. BID PERFORMANCE GUARANTIES Bid security (single copy) in the form of a cashier’s check drawn on an acceptable bank or

bid bond in the amount of at least ten (10%) percent of the bid price, payable without condition or qualification to Jefferson County School District No. R-1, shall accompany each bid, as evidence of good faith and as a guarantee that if awarded the contract, the Bidder will execute the Contract and give bond as required. The Bidder assumes all responsibility for furnishing acceptable bid security.

Bid security in the form of a bond will be accepted only if from a regularly established firm

licensed to write such surety in the State of Colorado and which is rated not lower than A1 in Best’s Insurance Guide, latest edition, or have a Best’s Financial Rating of X.

The bid security of each unsuccessful Bidder will be returned when the Construction

Agreement is fully executed. The bid security will be voided but retained by the Owner, if, after the Notice of Contract of Award, the Bidder shall enter into a Contract and file a satisfactory performance bond, labor and material payment bond, and certificates of required insurance, all within ten (10) calendar days after the date such notice is given by


the Owner. The bid security of the second and third lowest responsible Bidders may be retained for not to exceed forty-five (45) calendar days after opening, pending the execution of the Construction Agreement and submission of bond by the successful Bidder.

This bid security may be retained by the Owner as liquidated damages, if the bid is

accepted and a contract thereon is awarded but the successful Bidder fails to enter into a contract in the form prescribed with legally responsible sureties, within ten (10) calendar days after date of Notice of Contract Award is given by the Owner.

The Owner shall require the Bidder to whom a Contract is awarded to furnish the Owner

both Performance and Labor and Material Payment bonds in the amount of one hundred (100%) percent of the Contract price, covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder, and the Bidder will further provide warranties as required by the specifications or General Conditions.

The bonds shall be executed on the forms included with the Contract Documents (forms

shall not be removed from the Contract Documents; Bidders shall obtain original copies of the bond forms from the Owner). Accompanying each bond form shall be a “Power of Attorney” authorizing the attorney in fact to bind the surety company and certified to include the date of the bond.

6. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS The low three (3) bidders shall within twenty-four (24) hours following the bid opening notify

the Owner in writing of the entire list of subcontractors and suppliers of labor and material whose quotations he has used in preparation of his bid and whose services he proposed to use in construction of the project. The list must be complete showing all sections in the Construction Documents. Failure to submit such a list may preclude the bid from further consideration by the Owner. The Owner reserves the right to either disclose or not disclose the subcontractor list of the successful Bidder.

Each Bidder shall identify and fully disclose on such list all those subcontractors and

suppliers proposed for the work with which the bidder is connected either directly or indirectly as part owner, participant in profits and losses or in any other manner financially or economically.

7. PERMITS AND FEES Each contractor shall secure and pay for the legal permits and inspection fees required for the

execution of his work. The Owner is exempt from paying certain fees and it will be the contractor’s responsibility to acquaint himself with the laws and regulations governing said fees. Attention is directed to the requirements of the General Conditions regarding obtaining permits.

8. TAXES The Owner is exempt from the collection and payment of state sales and use taxes on any

materials, supplies or other equipment used or installed in the work. Some cities and municipalities may charge a local sales or use tax for materials, supplies or equipment picked up by the contractor in that city or municipality for use at a job site outside of that city or municipality. In such cases the contractor, subcontractors and suppliers should have all building materials, supplies, and equipment delivered to the job site by common carrier, by conveyance of the seller or by mail in order to be exempt from the local sales or use taxes. The contractor’s bid proposal and any agreed upon variations thereof shall include the cost


of any such taxes. For state sales and use taxes, it shall be the responsibility of the contractor and each subcontractor to complete and file an “Application for Exemption Certificate” with the Colorado Department of Revenue and submit copies of such Certificate to the Owner upon award of the contract and prior to commencing any work.

9. PREFERENCE FOR LOCAL MATERIALS, LABOR AND RESIDENT BIDDERS Preference is hereby given to materials, supplies and provisions produced, manufactured or

grown in Colorado, quality being equal to articles offered by competitors outside of the state. Each contractor shall comply with the provisions of Colorado Revised Statutes, Sections 8-17-101 and 102, and 8-18-101 and 103 (as amended) giving preference to Colorado labor and materials in performance of the work.

Preference shall also be given to resident bidders in accordance with provisions of Colorado

Revised Statutes, Section 8-19-101 and 102 (1985). 10. SIGNATURE OF BIDDERS Each Bidder shall sign the bid form and bid bond using his usual signature and giving his

full business address. If the Bidder is an individual, he must sign in individual capacity. Bids by partnerships shall be signed with the partnership name followed by the signature and designation of one of the partners or other authorized representative. Bids by corporations shall be signed with the name of the corporation followed by the signature and designation of the president or other person authorized to bind the corporation and attested to by the secretary with corporate seal. Bids by joint ventures shall be signed by each participant in the joint venture or by an authorized agent of each participant. The names of all persons signing should also be typed or printed below the signature.

A bid by a person who affixes to his signature the word “president”, “secretary”, “agent”, or

other designation without disclosing his principal may be held to be the bid of the individual signing. When requested by the Owner, evidence of the authority of the person signing shall be furnished.

11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS Bid Documents shall be enclosed in two envelopes (outer and inner), or one opaque

envelope, each of which shall be sealed and clearly labeled “BID DOCUMENTS” and identified with the description of the work to which the proposal applies; the name of the project; the name and address of the Bidder; and the time of opening bids; all in prominent lettering so as to guard against opening prior to the stipulated time. No responsibility shall attach to any employee of the Owner for the premature opening of any bid not prominently identified. The Bidder shall be responsible for placing his firm name and the name and number, if applicable, of the project and the time of the bidding on the outside of such bid envelope.

The Bid Documents shall be submitted at the time and location as noted in the Invitation to

Bid. Bids received after the specified time of closing will be returned unopened. 12. WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS Any Bidder may withdraw his bid if written request for withdrawal signed in the same manner

and by the same person who signed the Bid Form is received by the individual of the School District requesting the bids prior to the time established for the opening of the bids.

No Bidder may withdraw his bid for forty-five (45) days after the scheduled time set for the


opening thereof, or before award of Contract, unless said award is delayed for a period exceeding forty-five (45) calendar days.

13. MODIFICATIONS No oral, telephonic, or telegraphic modifications will be considered. 14. ACCEPTANCE OF BIDS The Owner reserves the right to accept the bid which in its judgment is the most responsible

and best bid or to reject any and all bids and alternatives and to waive or disregard irregularities or informalities in any bid as it may deem to be in the best interest of the School District. The Board of Education or its designees may consider as irregular any bid on which there is an alteration of, or departure from, the bid form. All proposals received after the specified time of closing shall be returned unopened.

Final determination of compliance with specifications will rest with the Owner. 15. TIME OF COMPLETION It is to be understood that time is of the essence for the Contract and the contractor will be

required to perform the work within the allowable time set forth in the Contract. In this connection, attention is directed to the provisions of the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions, if any, relative to delays, extensions of time, and liquidated damages. The successful Bidder-contractor shall prepare and submit for the Owner’s approval, within ten (10) days after the Notice of Award, a Preliminary Construction Schedule or Schedules that will indicate the time of performance and completion of the various portions of the work and the dates on which the Owner may expect to be allowed to occupy portions of the building. A Detailed Construction Schedule shall be submitted by the Contractor prior to the submission of the first request for payment. No partial payment on account of work performed shall be made until such Detailed Construction Schedule has been approved by the Owner.

The Owner and the Contractor shall agree mutually on any changes in either the schedule

or the rate of performance of the work which might either favorably or adversely affect such schedule dates. Unless otherwise specifically agreed in writing, no additional compensation or fee shall be paid by the Owner for any completion of all or any portions of the work earlier than scheduled.

16. APPLICABLE LAWS AND REGULATIONS Each Bidder shall familiarize himself with all state and local laws, codes, ordinances, and

regulations which might in any manner affect the work to be done; the materials to be supplied; the taxes, permits and fees to be paid; or the labor to be employed in and about the work. Any claim of misunderstanding or ignorance on the part of any successful Bidder will not in any way excuse such Bidder from the necessity of full compliance with every such law, code, ordinance, or regulation. All state laws, codes and regulations and local ordinances, which are applicable, shall be complied with including but not limited to those specified in these documents.


17. EVIDENCE OF COMPETENCY Bidders shall submit within three (3) days, if requested by the Owner such evidence of the

Bidder’s competency and practical knowledge to do the particular work covered by his proposal and of the Bidder’s financial responsibility, resources, experience, organization and equipment to complete the proposed work. Failure to comply with this requirement may result in the rejection of consideration of such bid. The right is reserved to reject any bid where an investigation of the evidence or information submitted by such Bidder does not demonstrate fully that the Bidder is qualified to properly carry out the terms of the contract.

In determining the Bidder’s qualifications, the following factors, among others, will be

considered: work previously completed by the Bidder; the qualifications of the proposed subcontractors for their work; Bidder references; and whether the Bidder (a) maintains a permanent place of business; (b) has adequate plant and equipment to do the work properly and expeditiously; (c) has the financial resources to meet all obligations incident to the work; (d) has appropriate technical experience; and (e) has adequate, competent, experienced staff and supervisors who will be committed to the work until completion.

Each Bidder may be required to show that he has handled former work and that no just

claims have been prosecuted or are pending against such work. No bid will be accepted from a Bidder who is engaged on any work which would impair his ability to perform or finance this work or other work in progress.

18. INSURANCE

Throughout the life of the contract, the Contractor will be required to carry the types and amounts of insurance named in the General Conditions.

19. CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE Any successful Bidder may be required by the Owner to obtain the necessary and

applicable Contractor’s License from all appropriate governmental authorities and if required, shall not allow any subcontractor to commence work on his subcontract until all similar provisions required of the subcontractor have been obtained and approved.

END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00 30 00-1

BID PROPOSAL FORM TO: Board of Education Jefferson County School District No. R-1 c/o Facilities Planning and Design 809 Quail Street, Building #4 Lakewood, Colorado 80215 FROM: PROJECT IDENTIFICATION: Kitchen Door Replacement ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS: The undersigned Bidder acknowledges examination of the following:

a) Contract Documents • Project Manual with drawings dated April 1, 2013 • Schedule restrictions outlined in Supplementary Conditions

b) Project Site / Existing Conditions

c) Receipt of Addenda Numbers:____, ,

AGREEMENTS: The undersigned Bidder agrees to the following:

a) To hold bid open for 45 calendar days from date of Bid Opening. b) To accept provisions of the Instructions to Bidders regarding disposition of the Bid Security. c) To enter into and execute the Construction Agreement within ten (10) calendar days of award,

if awarded on the basis of this bid, including identified Bonds and Insurance. d) To accomplish the work in compliance with the Contract Documents. e) The Jefferson County School District No. R-1 reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to

waive informalities. f) The Jefferson County School District No. R-1 reserves the right to award separate or single

contracts. g) The Jefferson County School District No. R-1 reserves the right to award the contract on the

basis of either cost or schedule. h) The Contractor agrees to pay the Jefferson County School District No. R-1 liquidated

damages according to the terms, amount(s) and date(s) defined in the General Conditions. i) To complete the project, including alternates, by the stipulated completion date as defined in

the General Conditions. BASE BID: LUMP SUM OF:

Dollars ($ ) SCHEDULE:

00 30 00-2

The Contractor may begin procurement and mobilization on May 3, 2013 and construction may begin on May 30, 2013. The work must be completed by October 14, 2013. ATTACHMENTS:

a) Bid Security b) List of Subcontractors (required within 24 hours of bid opening)

Dated this day of , SIGNATURES: The Bidder Address County of Incorporation Phone By: Print Name/Title Signature ATTEST: Print Name/Secretary Signature If the Bid is being submitted by a Corporation, the Bid Form should be signed by an officer (i.e., President or Vice President). The signature of the officer signing shall be attested to by the Secretary and properly sealed. If the Bid is being submitted by an individual or a partnership, the Bid Form shall so indicate and be properly signed.

END OF SECTION

SEAL

00 31 00-1 Information Available to Bidders

SECTION 00 31 00

INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS

A. Existing Conditions:

1. Close-out construction drawings, specifications, and files pertaining to existing buildings and sites are available to the public for review during regular working hours at the Jefferson County School District R-1 Facilities Planning and Design Archives (303) 982-2466.

a. Original Drawings and Subsequent Additions and Renovations of all schools included

within the project

B. Environmental Assessment Information

1. Regardless of project scope, work in existing buildings can pose significant issues of coordination, scheduling, containment, construction utilities, and restrictions on the building use.

2. Jefferson County School District R-1 urges Bidders to become familiar with the potential constraints and special coordination necessary to avoid disturbing asbestos containing materials.

3. Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) Management Plans are available to the public for review during regular working hours either on-site or in the Jefferson County School District R-1 Environmental Services Office (303) 982-2350.

END OF SECTION

00 41 00 - 1 Form Samples

SECTION 00 41 00 FORM SAMPLES 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Attached are samples of the following forms.

1. Bid Bond 2. Performance Bond 3. Labor and Material Payment Bond 4. Insurance Requirements 5. Criminal Records Check Certification 6. Construction Agreement

END OF SECTION

JCSD R-1Revised 9-94 1 of 1

BID BOND

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS that of , as Principal, and , a Corporation dulyorganized under the laws of the State of , and authorized to transact business inthe State of Colorado, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOLDISTRICT NO. R-1, Lakewood, Colorado, as Obligee, in the full and just sum of ten percent (10%) ofthe Principal's total bid price, lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum, well andtruly to be made, the Principal and the Surety bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators,successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.

WHEREAS, the said Principal is herewith submitting its proposal for the construction of , and

WHEREAS, the Obligee has required that said proposal be accompanied by a Proposal Guaranteein an amount not less than ten percent (10%) of the Principal's total bid price in fulfillment of whichrequirement this Bid Bond is made, executed, and delivered.

NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if the aforesaidPrincipal shall be awarded the Contract, the said Principal will, within the time required, enter into aformal contract and give a good and sufficient bond to secure the performance of the terms and conditionsof the contract and the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, thenthis obligation shall be void; otherwise the Principal and Surety will pay unto the Obligee the differencein money between the amount of the bid of the said Principal and the amount for which the Obligeelegally contracts with another party to perform the work if the latter amount be in excess of the former; inno event shall the Surety's liability exceed the penal sum hereof. The Surety, for value received, herebystipulates and agrees that the obligation of said Surety and its bond shall in no way be impaired oraffected by any extension of the time within which the Obligee may accept such bid, and said Surety doeshereby waive notice of any such extension.

Signed, sealed, and delivered .(Date)

(SEAL)

Witness to the Principal

(SEAL)

(SEAL)

This Bond must be accompanied by a current Power of Attorney

THIS BOND will be acceptable only if issued by an insurer rated not less than A- in Best's InsuranceGuide, or have a Best's Financial Rating of at least Class X.

JCSD-R-1 1Revised 9-94

JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. R-1

PERFORMANCE BONDBond No.

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS that , as Principal (the"Principal"), and , a corporation organized and existingunder the laws of the State of , and authorized to transact business in the State ofColorado, as Surety (the "Surety"), jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, personalrepresentatives, successors, and assigns to the JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. R-1,1829 Denver West Drive, Building 27, Golden, Colorado 80401, as Obligee (the "Owner"), in the principalamount of ($ ) as adjusted by approved changeorders (not to exceed 10 percent of the principal amount of this Bond unless expressly approved by theSurety, which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld) and interest as provided by law (collectivelyreferred to herein as the "Penal Sum"), for the performance of the Construction Agreement between thePrincipal and the Owner, dated , 20 , for the following (Project): together with the obligations of the Contract Documents, as defined in the Construction Agreement, all ofwhich documents are collectively referred to herein as the "Contract" and are incorporated by this reference.

The condition of this obligation is such that, if the Principal shall at all times duly, promptly, andproperly perform all the terms and conditions of the Contract and any authorized modifications thereofduring the original term of the Contract, any extensions thereof that may be granted by the Owner, andduring the term of any guarantee or warranty required under the Contract, the Principal and Surety shallhave no obligation under this Bond, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.

The Surety for value received agrees that no extension of time, change in, addition to, or otheralteration or modification of the terms of the Contract or work to be performed thereunder, or any otherforbearance on the part of either the Owner or the Principal to the other shall in any way release or affectthe Surety's liability or obligation on this Bond, and the Surety hereby waives notice of any such extensionof time, change, addition, modification, alteration, or forbearance.

Whenever the Owner terminates the Contract in accordance with the terms thereof, the Surety shall,within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notice of such termination, notify the Owner in writing of itselection to complete the Contract in accordance with its terms, or notify the Owner that the Surety electsnot to complete the Contract. If the Surety fails to give the written notice so required within such fifteen(15) calendar day period, then it will be deemed to have elected not to complete the Contract. Should theSurety elect to complete the Contract, then it shall, within fifteen (15) additional calendar days followingwritten notice of such election, obtain a contractor, subject to approval by the Owner in writing, tocomplete the original Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions and thereafter proceed with thework with due diligence and make available as the work progresses sufficient funds to pay the cost ofcompletion less the balance of the Contract price.


The Surety may not engage the Principal to complete the Contract, without the prior written consentof the Owner, which consent may be withheld in the Owner's sole discretion. If the Surety elects tocomplete the Contract, then it shall be entitled to receive the balance of the Contract price, less (i) anyamounts paid by the Owner to the Principal; (ii) costs incurred by the Owner in correcting any defectivework; (iii) any additional legal, design professional, and other costs incurred by the Owner resulting fromthe Principal's default; and (iv) liquidated damages caused by delayed performance or nonperformance ofthe Principal. Any progress payments, less retainage, due but not paid at the date of termination shall bepaid to the Surety so long as the Surety has agreed to indemnify the Owner for the amount thereof and noother claims have been made to such funds by subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the Contractor applicable law.

In the event the Surety elects not to complete the Contract, the Owner may then have the workcompleted by such means and in such manner, by contract with or without public bidding, or otherwise, asit may deem advisable. The Surety in such event shall at all times make available, as work progresses underthe Contract between the Owner and its new contractor, sufficient funds, not to exceed the Penal Sum, topay the cost of the completion of the Contract pursuant to its terms, together with the other amounts setforth in (i) through (iv) above, but in no event shall the Surety be responsible for the payment of any sumsto the Owner until the Owner has paid in full its total obligation under the terms of the original Contract, pluschange orders, less deductions and claims chargeable by law or by the Contract, if any, and less theretainage which will be disbursed as provided by the Contract Documents and applicable law.

The procedures set forth herein shall apply should there be a default and termination or a successionof defaults and terminations in fulfilling the terms and conditions of the work under the original Contract.

In the event there are negotiations between the Principal and/or the Surety and the Ownersubsequent to the date of termination, each party shall appoint an authorized representative with authorityto represent it during the negotiations. All written communications and official discussions between theparties shall be conducted by these authorized representatives. Any notice which any party desires or isrequired to provide another shall be in writing and shall be effective upon receipt when delivered ortransmitted by personal delivery, certified (return receipt) mail, or express mail service to the addresses setforth herein.

Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competentjurisdiction in the location in which the work is located and shall be instituted before the expiration of three(3) years from the date on which final payment under the contract is made; provided, however, that thisperiod may be extended by one (1) additional year by the Owner's giving written notice to the Surety withinthe three (3) year period of a potential claim. Any judgment recovered hereunder by the Owner shallinclude interest at the legal rate, together with reasonable attorneys' fees and costs.


No right action shall accrue under this Bond to or for the use of any person or entity other than theOwner or its successors and assigns.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have signed this Performance Bond as of the day of , 20 .

ATTEST:By: (Principal)

(SEAL) Address: ATTEST:

By: (Surety)

(SEAL) Address: Claims Telephone No.:

Claims Telecopier No.:

Best's Rating: Best's Financial Rating: Date:

This Bond will be acceptable only if issued by an insurer rated no less than A-, Best'sInsurance Guide, or have a Best's Financial Rating of at least class X. The fully executed bond form mustbe accompanied by a current Power of Attorney.

END OF PERFORMANCE BOND

1 of 2Revised 9-94


LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND

Bond No.

(This Bond is issued simultaneously with a Performance Bond in favor of the Owner conditioned on the full andtimely performance of the Contract.)

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS that , as Principal (the"Principal"), and , a corporation organized and existing underthe laws of the State of , and authorized to transact business in the Stateof Colorado, as Surety (the "Surety"), jointly and severally bind themselves, their heirs, personalrepresentatives, successors, and assigns, to the JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. R-1,1829 Denver West Drive, Building 27, Golden, Colorado 80401, as Obligee (the "Owner"), for the use andbenefit of it and the claimants as defined below, in the principal amount of ($ ) as adjusted by approved change orders (not to exceed 10percent of the principal amount of this Bond unless expressly approved by the Surety, which approval shall notbe unreasonably withheld) and interest as provided by law, for the payment of all amounts which become dueunder the Contract described below.

The Principal and the Owner have entered into a written Construction Agreement dated , 20 , together with related "Contract Documents" as defined therein (all of whichare collectively referred to as the "Contract" and incorporated herein by this reference), for the followingProject:

The condition of this obligation is such that, if the Principal shall at all times promptly make paymentof all amounts, claims, or demands lawfully due to all persons, firms, associations, or corporations supplyingor furnishing to the Principal or its subcontractors labor or materials, supplies, or equipment which are used,provided, or performed in the prosecution of the work provided for in the Contract and any and all dulyauthorized modifications of the Contract that may hereafter be made, then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise, the Surety shall pay the full value of all such claims or demands and shall indemnify and hold theOwner harmless from all payments which the Owner may be required to make under the Contract orapplicable law in excess of the Contract price not exceeding the amount of this obligation, together with interestas provided by law, as well as attorneys' fees and costs incurred by the Owner in the resolution of any claim. All such subcontractors, laborers, and materialmen shall have rights under the within Bond as are set forth inthe statutes and laws of the State of Colorado.

Further, each and every claimant, who institutes a lawsuit for compensation or payment under the termspayment under the terms hereof, as part of any court award, shall be entitled to reasonable attorneys' fees andcosts.

2 of 2Revised 9-94

The undersigned Surety for value received hereby agrees that no extension of time, change in, additionto, or other modification of the terms of the Contract or work to be performed thereunder, or of thespecifications, or of the Contract Documents, shall in any way affect its obligation on this Bond and the Suretyhereby waives notice of any such extension of time, change, addition, or modification.

Any notice which any party desires or is required to provide another shall be in writing and shall beeffective upon receipt when delivered or transmitted by personal delivery, certified (return receipt) mail, orexpress mail service to the addresses set forth herein.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, said Principal and Surety have executed this Bond, this day of , 20 .

ATTEST: By:

(Principal)

(SEAL) Address:

ATTEST:By: (Surety)

(SEAL) Address:Claims Telephone No.:Claims Telecopier No.:

Best's Rating: Best's Financial Rating: Date:

This Bond will be acceptable only if issued by an insurer rated no less than A-, Best's Insurance Guide,or have a Best's Financial Rating of at least class X. The fully executed Bond form must be accompanied bya current Power of Attorney.

END OF LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND

H:\Jeffco Mitchell ES Operable Partition\Specs\Div 00,01\InsuranceReqts2004R1.doc

Revised 4-25-05

No. Standard Insurance Requirements for Goods and Services

(1) Colorado Workers' Compensation insurance - Statutory (coverage A)

(2) Employer's liability insurance - $1,000,000 (coverage B)

(3) Commercial automobile liability insurance covering claims for injuries to

members of the public and/or damages to property of others arising from the use

of motor vehicles, with a $2,000,000 combined single limit for bodily injury

and property damage liability. Coverage should apply to any auto.

(4) Commercial liability insurance covering claims for injuries to members of the

public or damage to property of others (including Products and Completed

Operations) arising out of any negligent act or omission of the Contractor or any

of its employees, agents, or subcontractors. The policy shall be an occurrence

form, with the following limits:

$2,000,000 Each Occurrence, premises and operations

$2,000,000 Products and completed operations

$2,000,000 Personal and Advertising injury

$2,000,000 General Aggregate (aggregate limits must be maintained by

contract-the District to be advised of erosion of limits)

$2,000,000 liability assumed under insured contract, including defense costs.

$50,000 fire damage, any one fire.

$5,000 medical payments (any one person)

(5) The District must be named as an Additional Insured on the automobile and

general liability coverage's. For construction contracts, also request that the

Commercial General Liability "Additional Insured" provision extend to

completed operations.

(6) Professional liability insurance - (architects and engineers) with limits of

$2,000,000/$2,000,000 aggregate. Since aggregates are standard on these

policies, the higher limit is recommended. " Claims made" policies should be

required to be ongoing by contract or contain an extended reporting provision of

at least (2) years.

(7) The policies must contain a waiver of subrogation on behalf of the District.

(8) All certificates must state that the carrier will provide the District with a

minimum of (30) day's notice of cancellation or non-renewal of the policies.

(9) Nothing in contract or insurance requirement waive or intend to waive the

monetary limitations or any other rights, immunities, and protections provided

by the Colorado governmental Immunity Act, 24-10-101 et seq., as from time to

time amended, or otherwise available to the District or its officers, employees,

agents and volunteers.

(10) All insurance carriers must have an AM Best rating of A-VIII or better.

(11) Depending on the potential for direct/indirect loss, projects with a dollar value

less than $250,000, $1million limits of liability may be acceptable.

Non-Standard Risks That Require Special Handling

Requirements for non-standard risk projects will be evaluated by Risk

Management and Director of CM. It is not the size of the project, but the

potential for direct and indirect loss. Examples:

Waste management and other pollution related exposures

Asbestos abatement

Boiler maintenance

Elevator maintenance

Projects outside Colorado

Design professionals (i.e. Software developers)

Bus charters

*Contact Risk Management

*For large projects obtain the policies.

Approved 1/03/2005

Criminal Records Check Certification 200604_

Criminal Records Check Certification I, , certify that: Name of Contractor

1. I have carefully read and understand the General Conditions of the Contract, Article 10.4, regarding the Criminal Records Check required by Jefferson County School District, R-1.

2. Due to the nature of the work I will be performing for the District, my

employees May have contact with the students in the District.

3. None of the employees who will be performing the work have been convicted of a violent or serious felony as defined in the General Conditions of the Contract, Articles 10.4 and 61.2. This determination was made by a background check through the Department of Justice or the Colorado Bureau of Investigation.

(https://www.cbirecordscheck.com/Index.asp) I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed at , Colorado, on Date Signature Typed or Printed Name Title Address

https://www.cbirecordscheck.com/Index.asp

Project Name, ID# Page 1 of 4

CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this day of April 2007 by and between the JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. R-1, State of Colorado, (hereinafter designated as the "Owner"), and

(Contractor) (Address) (Address)

(incorporated in the State of ), of the County of , State of , (hereinafter designated as the "Contractor"), in connection with the construction of:

(SCHOOL) (Address) (Address)

(DISCRIPTION)

Complete with all work appurtenant thereto.

In consideration of the compensation to be paid to the Contractor and of the mutual agreements herein contained, the parties agree as follows: CA - 1.00 SCOPE OF THE WORK

The Contractor will furnish all tools, equipment, machinery, supplies, superintendence, insurance, transportation and other construction accessories, services and facilities specified or required to be incorporated in and form a permanent part of the completed work. In addition, the contractor shall provide and perform all necessary labor in a first class and workmanlike manner and in accordance with the conditions and prices stated in the Bid Proposal and the requirements, stipulations, provisions and conditions of the Contract Documents as defined in the attached General Conditions, said documents forming the contract and being as fully a part thereof as if repeated verbatim herein; perform, execute, construct and complete all things mentioned to be done by the Contractor and all work included in and covered by the Owner's official award of this contract to the Contractor, such award being based on the acceptance by the Owner of the Contractor's bid, or part thereof. CA - 2.00 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The contract Documents shall consist of this written Agreement, which Agreement shall incorporate by this reference all of the instruments set out in Article 1 of the General Conditions as fully as if they were set out in this Agreement in full, all of which documents and instruments are incorporated by the signature of the parties hereto.


CA - 3.00 TIME OF COMPLETION

The contractor agrees to commence work under this Agreement no later than _Day Month Year and to fully complete all work by no later than Day Month Year. CA - 4.00 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

The contractor understands and agrees that the completion of the entire project within the time provided is an essential feature of this Agreement and that the Owner will sustain substantial damages, the amount of which is not possible to accurately determine at this time, if the work is not so completed. The Contractor, therefore, agrees to proceed with due diligence, taking all precautions and making all necessary arrangements to insure the completion of the work within the prescribed time. The Contractor further agrees that his failure to finally and fully complete the work within the time allowed shall be considered as a breach of the Agreement and entitle the Owner to collect liquidated damages for the delay in completion in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract in the sum of ($) per calendar day. CA - 5.00 CONTRACT SUM

The Owner shall pay to the Contractor for performance of the work encompassed by this Agreement, and the Contractor will accept as full compensation for Base Bid for the lump sum of: _____ __ ($)

subject to adjustment as provided by the Contract Documents, to be paid by progress payments in cash or its equivalent in the manner provided for in the Contract Documents. The amount of money appropriated by the Owner for the Project is equal to or in excess of the contract sum. CA - 6.00 ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT

Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner shall make such inspection, and when the work is found to be acceptable under the Agreement and the Agreement fully performed, including the satisfactory completion of all punch list items, the Architect shall promptly so certify to the Owner, over his own signature, stating that the work provided for in this Agreement has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and is accepted by him under the terms and conditions therefor, and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor, and noted in said final certificate, is due and payable. Before issuance of the Owner's Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that all payrolls, material bills, and other indebtedness connected with the work has been or will promptly be paid. CA - 7.00 ALTERATIONS

The following alterations were made in this Agreement before it was signed by the parties: N/A


CA - 8.00 REPRESENTATIONS

The Contractor shall not extend the credit or faith of the Owner to any other persons or

organizations.

CA - 9.00 ASSIGNMENT The Contractor shall not assign any of his rights or obligations under this Agreement without

the express written consent of the Owner. Upon any assignment even though consented to by the Owner, the Contractor shall remain liable for the performance of the work under this Agreement. CA - 10.00 PARTIAL INVALIDITY

If any provisions of this Agreement are in violation of any statute or rule of law of the State of Colorado, then such provisions shall be deemed null and void to the extent that they may be violative of law, but without invalidating the remaining provisions hereof. CA - 11.00 WAIVER

No waiver of any breach of any one of the agreements, terms conditions or covenants of this Agreement by the Owner shall be deemed or imply or constitute a waiver of any other agreement, term, condition or covenant of this Agreement. The failure of the Owner to insist on strict performance of any agreement, term, condition or covenant, herein set forth, shall not constitute or be construed as a waiver of the Owner's rights thereafter to enforce any other default; neither shall such failure to insist upon strict performance be deemed sufficient grounds to enable the Contractor to forego or subvert or otherwise disregard any other agreement, term, condition or covenant of this Agreement. CA - 12.00 ENTIRE AGREEMENT

The within Agreement, together with the Contract Documents as defined in Article 2.00 herein, constitute the entire agreement of the parties hereto. No modification, change, or alteration of the within Agreement shall be of any legal force or effect unless in writing, signed by all the parties hereto. CA - 13.00 COUNTERPARTS

This Agreement may be executed in several counterparts and each such counterpart shall be deemed an original. CA - 14.00 GOVERNING LAW

Venue for any and all legal actions regarding or arising out of the transaction covered herein shall be solely in the District Court in and for Jefferson County, State of Colorado. This transaction shall be governed by the laws of the state of Colorado. CA - 15.00 ATTORNEYS' FEES

In the event it becomes necessary for either party to enforce any provisions or breach of this


Agreement by commencing litigation, the prevailing party in such action shall be entitled to collect, as part of any judgment entered, its reasonable expert witness and attorneys' fees and costs. CA - 16.00 NOTICES

All notices, requests, demands and other communications given or to be given under this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly given when served if served personally, or on the second day after mailing if mailed by first class mail, registered or certified, postage prepaid, and properly addressed to the party to whom notice is to be given as set forth below.

If to Owner: Cheryl K. Humann Executive Director, Construction Management Jefferson County School District No. R-1 809 Quail Street, Building #4 Lakewood, Colorado 80215

If to Contractor, then to the individual at the address set forth in the signature block below. Either party may change its address for purposes of notice by giving written notice to the other party in accordance with this paragraph.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement on the day and year first above written, and shall extend to and bind the parties, their successors, assigns and personal representatives

JEFFERSON COUNTY SCHOOL DISTRICT NO. R-1, STATE OF COLORADO

ATTEST: _________________________________ By: _________________________________ Cheryl K. Humann, Executive Director Construction Management (Contractor) ATTEST: _________________________________ By: _________________________________ (Address) (SEAL)

JCSD General Conditions of the Agreement

Revised January 2011


LAKEWOOD, COLORADO

__________________________________________________________________________

G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S O F T H E C O N T R A C T

___________________________________________________________________________

ALPHABETICAL INDEX TO THE ARTICLES PAGE #

ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT .................................................................................. 34

ACCESS TO WORK .................................................................................................................... 11

APPROVAL OF SUBSTITUTIONS ............................................................................................ 29

ARCHITECT'S STATUS AND INSPECTIONS ......................................................................... 26

ASSIGNMENT ............................................................................................................................. 32

BENCHMARKS, MONUMENTS, STAKES, AND MEASUREMENTS .................................. 10

BLASTING ................................................................................................................................... 31

CASH ALLOWANCES ............................................................................................................... 27

CHANGED CONDITIONS .......................................................................................................... 16

CHANGES IN THE WORK......................................................................................................... 13

CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST OR ADDITIONAL TIME AND WAIVER OF

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ............................................................................................. 14

CLEANING UP ............................................................................................................................ 28

CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND PROGRESS REPORTS ................................................ 21

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ......................................................................................................... 1

CONTRACTORS' MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY ...................................................................... 32

CONTRACTOR'S PROJECT GUARANTEE AFTER COMPLETION ..................................... 35

CONTRACTOR'S SUPERINTENDENCE AND SUPERVISION ............................................. 12

CORRECTION OF WORK .......................................................................................................... 16

CUTTING, PATCHING, AND EXCAVATING ......................................................................... 28

DAMAGE TO UTILITIES ........................................................................................................... 30

DEFINITIONS ................................................................................................................................ 1

DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................... 4

EMPLOYEES ................................................................................................................................. 7

END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS ........................................................................................... 40

EXECUTION, CORRELATION, INTENT, AND INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT

DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................................................ 2

EXPEDITING MATERIALS ....................................................................................................... 37

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS ...................................................................................................... 16

HISTORICAL DATA ................................................................................................................... 31

INDEMNIFICATION ................................................................................................................... 33

INSURANCE ................................................................................................................................ 22

ITEMS COVERED BY CONTRACT PRICE ............................................................................... 2

LABOR DISPUTES ..................................................................................................................... 38

LABOR, WORKMANSHIP, AND SCHOOL SECURITY ......................................................... 38

LIENS ........................................................................................................................................... 33

LIMITATION OF ACTIONS AND VENUE ............................................................................... 36


Revised January 2011

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY IN COMPLETION ................................................... 34

MATERIALS, LABOR, FACILITIES, AND STORAGE ............................................................. 6

MISCELLANEOUS KEYS, SWITCHES, ETC. ......................................................................... 37

OCCUPANCY .............................................................................................................................. 30

ORAL STATEMENTS ................................................................................................................... 2

OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT WORK ............................................................................ 18

OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT ................................................................... 18

PAYMENT ................................................................................................................................... 19

PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS ............................................................................ 24

PREFERENCE FOR COLORADO LABOR, MATERIALS, AND RESIDENT BIDDERS ..... 37

PROJECT SIGN ........................................................................................................................... 31

PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY ........................................................................... 10

REFERENCE STANDARDS ......................................................................................................... 2

RELATIONS OF CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR ................................................. 25

ROYALTIES AND PATENTS ...................................................................................................... 9

SALES AND USE TAX ............................................................................................................... 29

SEPARATE CONTRACTS ......................................................................................................... 32

SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES ........................................................................................... 5

SOIL TEST REPORT ................................................................................................................... 36

STATUTES, ORDINANCES, AND REGULATIONS ............................................................... 29

SUBCONTRACTS ....................................................................................................................... 25

SURVEYS, PERMITS, LAWS, REGULATIONS, AND TAXES ................................................ 9

TEMPORARY OR TRIAL USAGE ............................................................................................ 31

TESTING OF BUILDING SYSTEMS ......................................................................................... 31

USE OF PREMISES ..................................................................................................................... 28

WARRANTIES ON PORTIONS OF THE WORK ..................................................................... 35

WORK IN EXISTING BUILDING .............................................................................................. 33


Revised January 2011 1

GC 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.1 The work shall be accomplished in accordance with the Contract Documents which

shall be included in this Contract and shall consist of the Invitation to Bid, Instructions to

Bidders, Bid Security, Proposal, Notice of Contract Award, Insurance Policies and

Certificates, Notice to Proceed, Performance Bond, Labor and Material Payment Bond,

Construction Agreement, the General Conditions of the Contract, Supplementary General

Conditions, drawings and specifications, tests and engineering data, approved change orders,

Contractor's Requests for Payment, Architect's Certificates, and all addenda issued by the

Owner or Architect prior to the awarding of the Contract.

GC 2. DEFINITIONS

Words, phrases, and other expressions used in these Contract Documents shall have meanings as

follows:

2.1 "Contract" or "Contract Documents" shall include the items enumerated above under

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.

2.2 "Owner" shall mean the Jefferson County School District No.R-1, named and

designated as such in the Contract Documents acting through its duly authorized

representative.

2.3 "Contractor" shall mean the corporation, company, partnership, firm, entity, or

individual named and designated as such in the Contract Documents which has entered

directly into this Contract with the Owner for the performance of the work covered thereby,

and any persons or entities acting on its behalf.

2.4 "Subcontractor" shall mean and refer to a corporation, partnership, entity, or

individual having a direct contract with the Contractor or another subcontractor for

performing work and/or furnishing labor or material which is incorporated into the work at

the request of the Contractor or other subcontractor.

2.5 "Architect" shall mean the architects or engineers designated, appointed, or otherwise

employed or delegated by the Owner, or its duly authorized representatives, acting within the

scope of the particular duties entrusted to them in each case.

2.6 "Notice to Contractor" shall be deemed to have been duly served if made in writing

and delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the

corporation for whom it is intended, or if sent by registered or certified mail to the last

known business address.

2.7 "The work" shall mean the equipment, supplies, materials, labor, and services to be

furnished under the Contract and the carrying out of all obligations imposed or required by

the Contract Documents.

2.8 "The project" is the total construction designed by the Architect of which the work

performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part.

2.9 All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.

2.10 The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Colorado.

2.11 The date of completion of a project is the date when construction is certified by the

Architect to be finally completed in accordance with Contract Documents, as modified by

any change orders agreed to by the parties and when the Owner has fully accepted the project



for the use for which it was intended. Such date will be set forth on a Letter of Acceptance

issued by the Owner.

2.12 "Drawings" or "plans" shall mean all (a) drawings furnished by the Owner and/or

Architect as a basis for the award of Contract; (b) supplementary drawings furnished by the

Owner and/or Architect to clarify and to define in greater detail the intent of the Contract

drawings and specifications; (c) drawings furnished by the Owner to the Contractor during

the progress of the work; and (d) engineering data and drawings submitted by the Contractor

during the progress of the work, provided such drawings are acceptable to the Architect.

2.13 "Specifications" are the written technical information concerning materials,

components, systems, and equipment as indicated on the drawings or plans and which state

the quality, performance, characteristics, and installations to be achieved by application of

construction methods.

GC 3. ORAL STATEMENTS

3.1 It is understood and agreed that the written terms and provisions of the Contract

Documents shall supersede all oral statements of representatives of the Owner, and oral

statements shall not be effective or be construed as being a part of this Contract.

GC 4. REFERENCE STANDARDS

4.1 Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or association, or to

codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or

tentative standard adopted and published at the date of the Contract Documents unless

specifically stated otherwise.

GC 5. ITEMS COVERED BY CONTRACT PRICE

5.1 Unless otherwise specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall accept the

compensation stated in the Construction Agreement as full payment for furnishing all the

materials, transportation, apparatus, temporary structures, equipment, services, fuel, energy,

light, water, labor, and tools, all risks and losses of every kind or description connected with

the prosecution of the work, and all other things necessary for the complete and proper

execution of the work contemplated by or reasonably implied from the Contract Documents,

within the time limits indicated therein.

GC 6. EXECUTION, CORRELATION, INTENT, AND

INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

6.1 Execution. The Contract Documents shall be signed in multiple copies as directed by

the Owner. Within ten (10) days of Notice of Contract Award, the Contractor shall submit to

the Owner a minimum of three (3) fully executed original sets of the Construction

Agreement; Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond with original Power

of Attorney; and certificates of required insurance coverage. The date of the Contract for

purposes of these documents shall be the date of the Notice of Contract Award letter. The



Owner will execute the Construction Agreement, assemble all copies, and distribute the

Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not commence the work until it receives the

Notice to Proceed.

6.2 Correlation. By executing the Contract, the Contractor represents that it has visited

the site, familiarized itself with the local conditions under which the work is to be performed,

and correlated its observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

6.3 Intent. The intention of the Contract Documents is to include all labor and materials,

tools, equipment, construction equipment, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other

facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work.

Materials or work described in words which as applied have a well-known technical or trade

meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards.

6.3.1 The organization of the specifications into divisions, sections, and articles, as the case

may be, and the arrangement of drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the

work among subcontractors or in establishing the extent of work to be performed by any

trade.

6.3.2 It is intended that even though work is not covered under any heading, division,

section, article, branch, class, or trade of the specifications, it shall nevertheless be

supplied if it is required elsewhere in the Contract Documents or is reasonably inferable

therefrom as being necessary to produce the intended results.

6.3.3 The specifications and drawings are intended to supplement but not necessarily

duplicate each other. Any work exhibited in the one and not in the other shall be

executed as if it had been set forth in both, so that the work will be constructed according

to the complete design as determined by the Architect.

6.4 Interpretation. Should anything necessary for a clear understanding of the work be

omitted from the specifications and drawings, or should the requirements appear to be in

conflict, the Contractor shall secure written interpretations or instructions from the Architect

before proceeding with the work affected thereby. It is understood and agreed that the work

shall be performed according to the true intent of the Contract Documents.

6.4.1 Where a conflict occurs between or within standards, specifications, and drawings,

the more stringent or higher quality requirements shall apply. The precedence of the

Construction Documents is in the following sequence:

6.4.2 Addenda to the drawings and specifications take precedence over the original

Construction Documents.

6.4.3 In the drawings, the precedence shall be drawings of larger scale over those of

smaller scale and noted materials over graphic indications.

6.4.4 Any work mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the drawings or shown

on the drawings and not mentioned in the specifications shall be of like effect as if shown

or mentioned in both. The Contractor shall examine the specifications and drawings and

check all dimensions and notify the Architect and the Owner of any discrepancies

between the specifications and drawings and any deficiencies, omissions, or errors before

any work is commenced.

6.4.5 In the event of any conflict between the Contract Agreement including the General

Conditions and the Specifications, the Contract Agreement including General Conditions

shall control. In the event of any conflict between the General Conditions and the

Contract Agreement, the Agreement shall control.



GC 7. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

7.1 Copies Furnished. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the

Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, all copies of drawings and specifications

reasonably necessary for the execution of the work.

7.2 Ownership of Drawings. All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished

by the Architect are the property of the Architect and the Owner, whether the work for which

they are made be executed or not, and are not to be used on other work except by written

agreement with the Architect and the Owner.

7.3 Drawings and Specifications Available on the Site. The Contractor shall maintain at

the site for the Owner and the Architect one copy of all drawings, specifications, addenda,

approved shop drawings, change orders, and other modifications, in good order and marked

to record all changes made during construction. The Contractor shall also keep on the site all

applicable standards, codes, manufacturer's or other specifications referenced in the Contract

Documents. The drawings, marked to record all changes made during construction, shall be

delivered to the Architect for the Owner upon completion of the work.

7.4 Figured Dimensions to Govern. Dimensions and elevations shown on the drawings

shall be accurately followed. No work shown on the drawings, the dimensions of which are

not indicated, shall be executed until necessary dimensions have been obtained from the

Architect.

7.5 Contractor to Check Drawings and Schedules. The Contractor shall check all

dimensions, elevations, and quantities shown on the drawings furnished to them by the

Architect, and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancy between the drawings and the

conditions on the ground, or any error or omission in drawings, or in the layout as given by

stakes, points, or instructions, which they may discover. Before ordering any material or

doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the building and shall be

responsible for the correctness of same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on

account of difference between actual dimensions and the measurements indicated on the

drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for

consideration before proceeding with the work. The Contractor will not be allowed to take

advantage of any error or omission in the drawings or Contract Documents. Full instructions

will be furnished by the Architect should such error or omission be discovered, and the

Contractor shall carry out such instructions as if originally specified.

7.6 Detail Drawings and Instructions. The Architect shall furnish with reasonable

promptness, additional instructions by means of drawings or otherwise, necessary for the

proper execution of the work. All such drawings and instructions shall be consistent with the

Contract Documents, true developments thereof, and reasonably inferable therefrom. The

work shall be executed in conformity therewith, and the Contractor shall do no work without

proper drawings and instructions.

7.7 Project Record Drawings. The Contractor shall maintain a Contract set of drawings

at the site with all changes or deviations from the original drawings neatly marked thereon in

a contrasting color. The Contractor shall also maintain a Contract set of specifications at the

site, noting therein by appropriate section, the names, models, and other distinguishing

characteristics of the products actually incorporated into the work. This set of drawings and

specifications shall be updated daily as the job progresses and shall be made available to the

Owner and Architect for inspection at all times. Upon completion of the work and before

final payment, this Project Record set of drawings and specifications shall be delivered to the



Architect. The accuracy of the Project Record Drawings shall be verified monthly as part of

the monthly payment application process.

GC 8. SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES

8.1 Shop Drawings. Shop drawings are drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules,

performance charts, brochures, manufacturer's literature, and other data which are prepared

by the Contractor or any subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor, and which

illustrate some portion of the work. The District encourages the submission of shop drawing,

product data and other submittals in electronic format.

8.2 Samples. Samples are physical examples furnished by the Contractor to illustrate

materials, finishes, equipment, or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the

work will be judged.

8.3 Subcontractor. The Contractor shall require each subcontractor to prepare, stamp

with his approval, and submit to the Contractor with reasonable promptness and in orderly

sequence so as to cause no delay in the work or in the work of any other subcontractor, all

shop drawings and samples on all shop fabricated items and on all matters, required by the

Contract Documents or subsequently by the Architect as covered by modifications. Shop

drawings and samples will properly identify specified items. At the time of submission, the

subcontractor shall inform the Contractor and the Architect in writing of any deviation in the

shop drawings or samples from the requirements of the Contract Documents. Substitutions

will be allowed only in accordance with the provisions of GC 37 hereinafter.

8.3.1 The Contractor shall also require each subcontractor to prepare and transmit

sufficient sets of prints of all shop drawings which are specially drawn for this project,

including detailed fabrication and erection drawings, setting drawings, diagrammatic

drawings, material schedules, and samples to the Contractor to meet the project

construction schedule and the subcontractors' Contract schedule, or shall present, in

writing, valid reasons for any delay.

8.3.2 All shop drawings for all equipment in a given system shall be submitted at one time,

each complete set in a separate brochure. Complete maintenance/warranty data are to be

submitted to the Contractor and Architect for review and for submission to the Owner at

the completion of the work and prior to final project acceptance.

8.3.3 Each sheet of shop drawings shall identify the project, subcontractor, and fabricator

or manufacturer and the date of the drawings. All shop drawings shall be numbered in

sequence and each sheet shall indicate the total number of sheets in the set.

8.3.4 The shop drawings shall indicate types, gauges, and finish of all materials. Sufficient

data in each set of shop drawings shall be included to permit a detailed study of the

system submitted and its conformance to the Contract Documents and design intent.

8.3.5 The Contractor will review, approve, stamp, and then submit the prints and samples

to the Architect for approval with copies to the Owner. After review, the Architect will

then return the prints to the Contractor with the Architect's appropriate comments. Those

returned for correction shall be corrected and resubmitted. Upon receiving the approved

prints from the Architect, the Contractor will make requested sets of prints for

distribution to appropriate subcontractors, fabricators, manufacturers, and suppliers who

require them for coordination of their work.



8.4 Verification. By approving and submitting shop drawings and samples, the

Contractor thereby represents that they have determined and verified all field measurements,

field construction criteria, dimensions, elevations, quantities, materials, catalog numbers, and

similar data, as shown on the drawings and specifications furnished by the Architect, or will

do so, and that they have checked and coordinated each shop drawing and sample with the

requirements of the work and of the Contract Documents.

8.5 Architect Review. The Architect will review and approve shop drawings and samples

with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay, but only for conformance with the

design concept of the project and with the information given in the Contract Documents.

The Architect's approval of a separate item shall not indicate approval of an assembly in

which the item functions. On the completion of the work, the Architect shall be furnished

two corrected copies of all shop or setting drawings showing the as-built condition of the

work. The Architect, after review, shall submit one of these copies to the Owner.

8.6 Corrections. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Architect and

shall resubmit the required number of corrected copies of shop drawings or new samples

until approved. The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted

shop drawings to revisions other than the corrections requested by the Architect on previous

submissions.

8.7 Contractor's Responsibility. The Architect's approval of shop drawings or samples

shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of

the Contract Documents unless the Contractor has informed the Architect in writing of such

deviation at the time of submittal and the Architect has given written approval to the specific

deviation, nor shall the Architect's approval relieve the Contractor from responsibility for

errors or omissions in the shop drawings or samples.

8.8 Architect Approval Required. No portion of the work requiring the submission of a

shop drawing or sample shall be commenced until such submittal has been approved by the

Architect. All such portions of the work shall be in accordance with approved shop drawings

and samples.

8.8.1 All material finishes and samples will be approved at one time. The Contractor shall

submit all items requiring approval of finishes, color, material, etc., with sufficient lead

time to allow simultaneous consideration and preparation of complete finish Color

Schedule. No approvals of single items will be considered.

GC 9. MATERIALS, LABOR, FACILITIES, AND STORAGE

9.1 Contractor's Responsibility. Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide

and pay for all materials, labor, tools, equipment, machinery, transportation, and other

facilities necessary for the proper execution and completion of the work. The Contractor

shall provide and pay for all the temporary facilities required to supply all the power, light,

water, and heat needed by him and the subcontractors for their work and shall install and

maintain all such facilities in such manner as to protect the public and workmen and conform

with any applicable laws and regulations. If temporary heat and/or protection is required for

the expeditious prosecution of the work and before the permanent heating apparatus is

available for use, the temporary heating apparatus shall be installed and operated in such a

manner that the finish work and/or construction will not be damaged thereby.



9.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall pay for all the power, light, and water

used by him and the subcontractors, without regard to whether such items are metered by

temporary or permanent meters. The cutoff date on permanent meters shall be either the

agreed date of full occupancy by the Owner or the date of final acceptance of the project,

whichever shall be the earlier date. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall

remove all such temporary facilities from the site.

9.2 Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both

workmanship and materials shall be of the highest quality. The Contractor shall furnish

satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Samples shall be furnished,

when specified, and the work shall be in accordance with those samples which have been

approved.

9.3 Facilities and Storage. The Contractor shall provide and maintain, in a neat and

sanitary condition, adequate temporary toilet facilities for the use of any and all employees

engaged on the work, in strict compliance with the requirements of all applicable codes,

regulations, laws, and ordinances. In no event may toilet facilities of any existing building at

the site of the work be used by employees of the Contractor or subcontractors. Upon

completion of the work, all such temporary facilities shall be removed from the site.

9.3.1 The Contractor shall provide suitable temporary facilities and shall maintain on

premises watertight storage shed or sheds, tool houses for storage of building materials

and tools which may be damaged by weather. The Contractor shall allow space for the

erection of sheds and provide similar facilities for storage by subcontractors of their

materials and tools. Storage of materials shall be confined to the site. These facilities

shall further provide for protection against theft and damage of building materials and

tools. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all such temporary

facilities from the site.

9.3.2 The Contractor shall provide adequate, weatherproofed, heated, and well-lighted

office space at the site of the work, for the use of the Architect and the Owner and their

representatives.

9.3.3 All of the foregoing facilities shall be of a quality and placed in locations acceptable

to the Architect and the Owner.

GC 10. EMPLOYEES

10.1 Qualifications. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall at all times enforce strict

discipline and good order among his employees, and shall not employ on the work any

person considered by the Architect or the Owner to be unfit or not skilled in the work

assigned to him. The Contractor shall also keep its employees and those of its subcontractor

from socializing upon the site of the work after normal work hours and from fraternizing at

any time with staff, students, parents, and other persons who are at the school or the site of

the work.

10.2 Drug-Free Zone. The Jefferson County School District No. R-1 is a drug-free zone.

In furtherance of this standard, the Contractor shall establish and maintain a safe and efficient

work environment for all employees, free from the effects of alcohol, controlled substances,

and illicit drugs. The manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of alcohol,

controlled substances, and illicit drugs is prohibited on or adjacent to the project site and all

of the Owner's property at all times. Illicit drug use is the use of illegal drugs and the abuse



of alcohol and other drugs, including anabolic steroids. Controlled substances are drugs

specifically identified and regulated under state or federal law and include, but are not

limited to, opiates, narcotics, cocaine, amphetamines and other stimulants, depressants,

hallucinogenic substances, and marijuana. The Contractor will strictly enforce this

prohibition among his own employees and his subcontractors and their employees at all

times. The Contractor and subcontractors shall require all of their employees to undergo

drug and alcohol testing if an employee is involved in an accident on the site which may have

been caused by human error which could be drug or alcohol related or when a supervisor has

reasonable suspicion or notice that the employee shows signs of possible intoxication, use, or

is under the influence of drugs, alcohol, or controlled substances. Employees who violate

these prohibitions will be subject to disciplinary action by their employers up to and

including termination and may be denied access to the site of the work. Violation of this

provision shall also constitute sufficient grounds for termination of the Contract or any

subcontract without damages or penalty to the Owner.

10.3 Equal Employment. During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees

not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed,

color, sex, national origin, disability, or age. The Contractor will take affirmative action to

ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment,

without regard to their race, creed, color, sex, national origin, disability, or age. Such action

shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or

transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other

forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor

agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment,

notices to be provided setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. The

Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of

the Contractor; state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment

without regard to race, creed, color, sex, national origin, disability, or age.

10.4 Criminal Record Verification. Successful bidder will be required to complete a

criminal records check on all employees who work on the project. Employees who have

been convicted of a felony, including crimes that require registration on the

National Sexual Offender Registry will not be allowed to work on the project. The

contractor must complete and submit the district’s Criminal Records Check Certification

form prior to starting work. Each individual contractor will be responsible to adhere to any

Federal, State or Local privacy and confidentiality requirements.

10.5 Responsibility for Employees. The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for

the acts and omissions of all his employees. The Contractor shall further be responsible for

the acts and omissions of all subcontractors, their agents and employees, and all other

persons acting on behalf of the Contractor or subcontractors as set forth herein.

GC 11. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS

11.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. They shall defend all suits or

claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall hold the Owner harmless from loss on

account thereof. If the Contractor has information that the process or article specified is an

infringement of a patent, they shall be responsible for such loss unless they promptly gives

such information to the Architect.



GC 12. SURVEYS, PERMITS, LAWS, REGULATIONS, AND TAXES

12.1 Surveys. As provided by the Owner, the Contractor shall obtain from the Architect a

copy of all surveys describing property lines, elevation benchmarks, physical characteristics,

and utility locations.

12.2 Permits and Licenses. The State building permit will be secured and paid for by the

Owner. Any other permits, governmental fees, and licenses necessary for the proper

execution and completion of the work shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor.

Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities shall be

secured and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise specified. The Owner is exempt from

paying any fee for any building permit issued by any building departments located in

Jefferson County. However, the Contractor shall secure such permit from proper

governmental agency if requested by Owner, in which case the cost of any such fee shall be

verified and paid by the Owner.

12.2.1 The Owner will negotiate and provide for all electrical, gas, water, and sewer mains

for Contractor's connections. The Contractor is to arrange with the utility company for

actual connection, make necessary connections, and pay for all inspection fees and

permits in connection therewith as required by any governmental agency. In addition, the

Contractor will furnish any material or items as required to complete all connections.

12.2.2 The Contractor shall coordinate and call for all inspections as required by the State of

Colorado, Division of Oil and Public Safety, State Plumbing, State Electrical, local Fire

Authority or authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) over the work.

12.2.3 All other required permits shall be taken out and paid for by the Contractor or

respective subcontractor as required by the governing public agency. The Contractor

shall call and pay for all inspections required by the State, Fire Department or public

agencies as required.

12.3 Laws and Regulations. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all

laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work as drawn and

specified. If the Contractor observes that the drawings and specifications are at variance

therewith, they shall promptly notify the Architect in writing and any necessary changes shall

be adjusted as provided in the Contract for changes in the work. If the Contractor performs

any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations, and

without such notice to the Architect, they shall bear all costs arising therefrom and to correct

same.

12.4 Taxes. The Owner is exempt from paying any State sales or State use taxes on any

materials, supplies, or other equipment used or installed in the work. To effectuate this

exemption, the Contractor shall obtain a Certificate of Exemption from the Colorado

Department of Revenue and file copies with the Owner before making any purchases or

commencing work. No amounts paid to the Contractor pursuant to this agreement shall

include reimbursement for such taxes.



GC 13. BENCHMARKS, MONUMENTS, STAKES, AND

MEASUREMENTS

13.1 Benchmarks. The Contractor shall properly stake out the work and provide and

rigidly set benchmarks and batter boards as necessary for the proper performance of the

work. The Contractor shall remain responsible for their maintenance and their accuracy. A

permanent benchmark, approved as to location and type by the Architect, from which all

grades are to be taken, shall be established near the site of the work by the Contractor. From

this benchmark the Contractor shall ascertain all grades and levels to the building as needed.

The Contract Documents shall include all necessary information to establish the benchmark.

13.2 Preservation of Monuments and Stakes. The Contractor shall carefully preserve all

monuments, benchmarks, property markers, reference points, and stakes. In case of his

destruction thereof, the Contractor will be charged with the expense of replacement and shall

be responsible for any mistake or loss of time that may be caused. Permanent monuments or

benchmarks which must be removed or disturbed shall be protected until properly referenced

for relocation. The Contractor shall furnish materials and assistance for the proper

replacement of such monuments or benchmarks.

13.3 Measurements. Before ordering any material or performing any work, the Contractor

shall verify all measurements at the project and shall be responsible for the accuracy of same.

No extra charge or compensation shall be allowed because of any difference between actual

dimensions and the measurements indicated in the drawings or specifications.

13.3.1 Any discrepancies shall be submitted to the Architect and Owner for consideration

before proceeding with the work.

GC 14. PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY AND STORMWATER

MANAGEMENT

14.1 The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide

all necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to all employees on the project and

all other persons who may be affected thereby; all the work and all materials and equipment

to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under the care, custody, or

control of the Contractor or any of their subcontractors; and other property at the site or

adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, and

utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

14.2 The Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of the Occupational Safety

and Health Administration (OSHA) and all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of

any public authority having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect

them from damage, injury, or loss. The contractor shall erect and maintain all necessary

safeguards for the safety and protection of workmen, owners, and users of adjacent facilities

and the public and shall post danger signs and other warnings against hazards created by such

features of construction as protruding nails, hoists, well holes, elevator shafts, hatchways,

scaffolding, window openings, stairways, excavations, and falling materials; and shall

designate a responsible member of his organization at the site whose duty shall be the

prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless

otherwise designated in writing by the Contractor to the Owner and the Architect.



14.3 The Contractor shall be liable for and shall promptly repair, remedy, indemnify, and

pay for all damage or loss to any person or property caused in whole or in part by the

Contractor, any subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or

by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, except damage or loss proximately

caused by faulty drawings or specifications or to the acts or omissions of the Owner or

Architect and not attributable to any fault or negligence of the Contractor.

14.4 In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the work or of adjoining property,

the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the Architect or Owner, is

hereby permitted to act, at their own discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury; and

they shall so act, without appeal, if so authorized or instructed. Any compensation, claimed

by the Contractor on account of emergency work, shall be determined by agreement.

Notification of and report of such emergencies shall be made immediately to the Owner and

Architect.

14.5 The contractor is responsible for securing and paying for the State Stormwater

Management Permit and/or local Stormwater Management Permit as may be required. The

contractor is responsible to ensure that all the requirements of either the State or local

Stormwater Management Permit are strictly followed during construction. The contractor

shall review and follow the Owners Illicit Discharge reporting procedures in the event of an

occurrence.

14.6 The Owner may engage a civil engineer to prepare an erosion control plan as part of

the over all contract documents. The contractor can use or modify the contract document

plan as necessary in their preparation of the Stormwater Management Permit application.

However, this does not relieve the contractor from preparing their own site specific plan for

application submission if no plan is provided in the contract documents.

14.7 The Owner or designated owners representative may inspect the Stormwater

Management plan, project site and BMP’s and communicate noted deficiencies for corrective

measures at any time during the construction project. The contractor shall be fined up to

$250 dollar per day in addition to any Federal, State or local fines until deficiencies are

corrected. The contractor shall coordinate all inspections required by the State or authority

having jurisdiction (AHJ).

14.8 The Owners final acceptance of the project and contractor de-mobilization, does not

relieve the contractor of their responsibilities and duties as required in the permit (i.e.

maintain BMP’s, regular and post event inspections as defined in the permit, etc.) while it is

still open. Final acceptance of ground areas including permanent stormwater structures shall

only occur after the required vegetation and stabilization has been established. The

contractor is required to conduct monthly inspections of the site and BMP’s during this

warranty period and make corrective changes to the BMP’s or add BMP’s as needed.

14.9 The contractor will notify the Owner in writing when they believe all vegetation and

stabilization has reached the contract requirements and they want to close the Stormwater

Management Permit. The Owner must be allowed the opportunity to review the site and

approve the contractors request to close the permit. The contractor can not apply to close the

Stormwater Management permit without the Owners written approval. It is the contractor

responsibility to remove and dispose of all BMP’s after the Stormwater Management Permit

has been closed.



GC 15. ACCESS TO WORK

15.1 Access. The Architect, the Owner, and their representatives shall at all times have

access to the work wherever it is in preparation or progress, and the Contractor shall provide

proper facilities for such access so that the Architect may perform his functions under the

Contract Documents.

15.2 Inspection. If the specifications, the Architect's instructions, laws, ordinances, or any

public authority require any work to be specially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give

the Architect timely notice of its readiness for checking by the Architect or inspection by

another authority, and if the inspection is by another authority, of the date fixed for such

inspection. All required certificates of inspection shall be secured by the Contractor. If any

work should be covered up without approval or consent of the Architect, it must, if required

by the Architect, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense.

15.2.1 Re-examination of questioned work may be ordered by the Owner, and if so ordered,

the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If work is found to be in accordance with

the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the cost of re-examination and

replacement. If such work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract

Documents, the Contractor shall pay such cost.

15.3 Testing. Materials incorporated into the project will be subject to routine tests as

required to ensure their compliance with the specifications. Such tests may include, but shall

not necessarily be restricted to, the following: Concrete: primary mix design, slump tests,

cylinder compressions tests, and air entrainment tests; Steel: tensile tests; Welds: field

inspection and x-ray examination; Soils: sub-soil investigation, physical analysis, and

compaction tests; Asphalt pavement: physical analysis and compaction tests; and

Roofing-Samples cut from in-place built-up roof.

15.3.1 Any other basic materials for which standard laboratory test procedures have been

established may also be included if doubt as to their quality should arise.

15.3.2 Any testing of the above nature will be done at the discretion of the Owner who will

bear all costs, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor

shall be held responsible for providing samples of sufficient size for test purposes and for

cooperating with the Owner or his representative in obtaining and preparing samples for

tests. All tests will be in accordance with standard test procedures and will be performed

by persons or firms selected by the Owner.

GC 16. CONTRACTOR'S SUPERINTENDENCE AND SUPERVISION

16.1 During the progress of the work, the Contractor shall ensure that a competent

superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Architect and the Owner,

are on the project site at all times while work is in progress. The superintendent shall not be

changed by the Contractor except with the consent of the Owner and the Architect unless the

superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in its employ.

In the event the superintendent ceases to be in the Contractor’s employ and a new

superintendent is selected for the Owner’s project, that superintendent will meet with the

approval of the Owner. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence, and

all directions given to superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. The

Architect and Owner shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the superintendent

or their assistants.



16.2 The superintendent shall remain on-site full-time through the actual date of final

completion, the completion of all punch list items, until the date of the Owner’s Letter of

Acceptance.

16.3 The Contractor shall provide full-time, qualified, and efficient supervision of the

work, using competent skill and attention. The superintendent shall be knowledgeable and

completed training in Stormwater Management & Erosion Control and OSHA construction

safety. The superintendent shall be knowledgeable of all building codes that govern the

construction of the project. The superintendent shall direct, schedule, and coordinate the

work. The superintendent is responsible for determining and supervising all temporary and

permanent erection and construction sequences, techniques, means and methods. The

superintendent shall coordinate the work to ensure that all parts fit together properly and in

accordance with the Contract Documents. The superintendent shall carefully study and

compare all Contract Documents and other instructions and shall at once report to the

Architect and the Owner any error, inconsistency, or omission which they may discover.

16.4 The superintendent shall see that the work is carried out in accordance with the

Contract Documents and in a thorough and first-class manner in every respect.

16.5 The Contractor shall provide engineering, surveying, and coordination to accurately

establish all lines, levels, and marks necessary to facilitate the operations of all concerned in

the Contractor's work. Contractor shall lay out the work in a manner satisfactory to the

Architect, making permanent records of all lines and levels required for excavation, grading,

and foundations, and for all other parts of the work. Contractor shall determine the

commencement and certify the proper completion of the various stages of construction.

GC 17. CHANGES IN THE WORK

17.1 Change Orders. The Owner may, at any time, by a written change order directed

through the Architect, without notice to the sureties and without invalidating the Contract,

make changes in the drawings and/or specifications of this Contract within the general scope

thereof; order extra work; or make changes by altering, adding to, or deducting from the

work. If such changes cause an increase or decrease in the amount due under this Contract,

or in the time required for its performance, an equitable adjustment shall be made on the

change order, and the Contract shall be modified in writing accordingly. Any claim of the

Contractor for adjustment under this clause must be asserted in writing within ten (10) days

from the date of receipt by the Contractor of the notification of change. No change order or

other form of order or directive by the Owner or Architect requiring additional compensable

work to be performed, which causes the aggregate amount payable under the Contract

Documents to exceed the amount appropriated for the original Construction Agreement shall

be issued unless the Contractor is given written assurance by the Owner that lawful

appropriations to cover the costs of the additional work have been made.

17.2 Minor Changes. In giving instructions, the Architects shall have authority to make

minor changes in the work, which do not involve extra cost, and which are not inconsistent

with the purposes of the building. Otherwise, except in an emergency endangering life or

property, no extra work or change shall be made unless in pursuance of a written order from

the Owner signed or countersigned by the Architect, or a written order from the Architect

stating that the Owner has authorized the extra work or change. No claim for an addition to



the Contract sum shall be valid unless ordered or authorized in the manner set forth in this

paragraph.

17.3 Price Differential. The cost or credit resulting from a change in the work shall be

determined in one or more of the following ways:

17.3.1 By estimate, with a detailed cost breakdown as set forth in subparagraph 17.3.3.

below, and acceptance in a lump sum, with a maximum combined mark-up to the Owner,

for the Contractor and all affected subcontractors, not to exceed a total of fifteen percent

(15%). Overhead, profit and additional fee on work performed by others shall be limited

to the percentages set forth below, and shall include insurance premiums not itemized

above, cost of office supervision and assistants, incidental job burdens, and general office

expense. The base for applying percentages shall not include the social security tax.

Such percentages are as follows:

17.3.1.1 To subcontractors and/or to the contractor for work performed with its own

forces, an overhead of 5.0% and a profit of 5.0%.

17.3.1.2 On proposals involving both increases and decreases in the amount of the

contract, the overhead, profit and fee will be allowed on any net increase only.

17.3.2 By unit prices named in the Contract or subsequently agreed upon.

17.3.3 If the parties are unable to agree on one of the above methods, then the

amount shall be determined by force account under the following formula:

17.3.3.1 The actual cost of all direct labor performed (including foremen employed

continuously on the work, but not the salary, or any part thereof, of the Contractor's

superintendent) and the actual materials furnished for and used in such work, less all

available cash, trade, or other discounts;

17.3.3.2 Rental for the use of such items of equipment as have an individual value in

excess of One Thousand Dollars ($1,000); provided that the amount of such rental

charge and the length of time and probable cost of the use of such equipment shall

have been authorized in writing by the Owner;

17.3.3.3 All proportionate sums paid for royalties, permits, and inspection fees;

17.3.3.4 All proportionate premiums for Public Liability Insurance, Worker's

Compensation, and other proper and necessary insurance, as well as all applicable

payroll taxes;

17.3.3.5 Either a predetermined lump sum, fixed fee, or a fee of fifteen percent (15%),

which fee shall be applied to the total of paragraphs 17.3.3.1, 17.3.3.2, and 17.3.3.3 .

only, and shall constitute full compensation to the Contractor for all costs and

expenses, including all overhead and profit, which are not otherwise enumerated

above. Subcontractors, if employed by the Contractor on this part of the work, will

receive such portion of the Contractor's fee as may be agreed and paid to them by the

Contractor.

17.3.3.6 The Contractor shall keep and present, in such manner as the Owner may

direct, an accurate accounting of all of the foregoing costs, together with all

supporting vouchers and other documentation, all subject to audit by the Owner.



GC 18. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST OR ADDITIONAL TIME AND

WAIVER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

18.1 Claims for Extra Cost or Time. If the Contractor claims that any instructions by

drawings or otherwise, after the date of the Contract, involve extra costs under this Contract

which were not included in the original bid, or requires an extension in the Contract time, he

shall give the Owner and the Architect written notice thereof no later than seven (7) calendar

days after the receipt of such instructions, and in any event before proceeding to execute the

work, except in an emergency endangering life or property, and the procedure shall then be as

provided for changes in the work. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. Any change

in the Contract amount or Contract time must be authorized by change order.

18.2 Delays and Extensions of Time. If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the

progress of the work by any act or neglect of the Owner or the Architect, or by any employee

of either, or by any separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the

work, or by unavoidable casualties, or by any cause which the Owner determines may justify

the delay, then the completion date shall be extended by change order for such reasonable

time as the Owner may determine.

18.2.1 If unusually severe weather conditions are a basis for a claim for additional time, the

weather experienced at the project site during the time of completion for the Project must

be found to be a greater magnitude than the anticipated adverse weather for the Denver

metro area during any given month. Such claim shall be documented by the contractor

by data substantiating that weather conditions were unusually sever in comparison to the

thirty (30) year average established by the climatologically data, U.S. Department of

Commerce, for the Denver area and could not have been reasonably anticipated. The

unusually sever weather must actually cause a delay to the completion of the Project by

preventing work on Critical Path scheduled activities for fifty-one (51%) or more of the

Contractor’s scheduled workday. The delay must be beyond the control and without the

fault or negligence of the contractor. If the unusually severe weather delay days

encountered exceed the thirty (30) year average, either a time extension for an equitable

number of days or costs for schedule recovery will be considered by the Owner.

18.2.2 If unusually adverse weather conditions are a basis of a claim for additional time, the

weather experienced at the Project site during the time of completion for the Project must

exceed the schedule based on the National Oceanic and atmospheric Administration

(NOAA) for the Denver Area and will constitute the base line for monthly weather time

evaluations. All subsequent monthly updates of the Contractor’s project schedule will

incorporate these anticipated adverse weather delays in all weather dependent activities.

Actual adverse weather delays must prevent work on critical path schedule activities for

fifty-one (51%) or more of the contractor’s scheduled workday. The number of actual

adverse weather delay days shall include days impacted by actual adverse weather (even

if adverse weather occurred in the previous months), be calculated chronologically from

the first to the last day of each month, and be recorded as full days. If the actual

cumulative number of adverse weather delay days encountered exceed the number of

anticipated above, giving full consideration for equivalent fair weather calendar days,

either a time extension for an equal number of day or costs for schedule recovery will be

considered by the Owner.

18.2.3 All requests for extension of time shall be subject to the Owner's approval and shall

be made in writing to the Owner no more than seven (7) days after the occurrence



causing the delay; otherwise they shall be waived. Any request for extension of time for

a change in the work or for any occurrence allegedly causing a delay as provided for

herein must be substantiated by demonstrating the effect of the change or occurrence on

the critical path of the Construction Schedule.

18.2.4 If no schedule or agreement is made stating the dates upon which written

interpretations or detail drawings shall be furnished, then no claim for delay shall be

allowed on account of failure to furnish such interpretations or drawings until fifteen (15)

days after demand is made for them, and not then unless such claim is reasonable.

18.2.5 Should the time for completion of the Contract be extended, the Owner reserves the

right to occupy any part of the structure upon written notice to the Contractor from the

Architect or the Owner, but only after the Architect has made a thorough inspection

accompanied by the Contractor's superintendent to note any defects in workmanship or

materials which are the responsibility of the Contractor. Any such partial occupancy

shall not be deemed a waiver of any provision for liquidated damages for delay in final

completion.

18.2.6 When the whole or a portion of the work is suspended for any reason, each

Contractor shall properly cover over, secure, and protect all work as may be susceptible

to damage from any cause.

18.3 This Article does not exclude the recovery of damages by the Owner for delay under

other provisions of the Contract Documents.

18.4 Waiver of Consequential Damages. Except as may otherwise be provided in the

agreement and/or General Conditions for liquidated damages, the Contractor and the Owner

waive claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to the

contract, including, without limitation, all consequential damages due to the Owner’s

termination of the contract.

GC 19. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

19.1 If the Contractor becomes aware of the presence of hazardous materials in any form

at the project site including, but not limited to, asbestos or other toxic substances they shall,

prior to commencement of any portion of the Work, provide notice to the District of the

presence, location, and condition of any known or suspected materials that are discovered.

Such notice shall be in writing and shall be submitted no more than twenty-four (24) hours

after such materials are discovered.

19.2 In the event of such discovery not previously identified by the Owner, the Contractor

shall not proceed with the Work until they have received written authorization from the

District. If the Contractor proceeds with the Work without said authorization, they do so at

their own risk.

19.3 In the event such materials are identified or encountered during the course of the

Project, the District, at its expense, shall take all reasonable actions to properly and safely

deal with such materials.

19.4 The Contractor acknowledges that the Contractor, its employees and agents, have the

responsibility of being fully informed of the District’s Management Plan as it relates to the

buildings located at the Project site and shall consult with the District about how such plan

addresses suspected or active asbestos containing material areas within such buildings. The

contractor assumes responsibility for notification to workers of existing asbestos conditions.



Notification shall be made on approved EPA forms and includes posting of notices in

accordance with OSHA, EPA and State Health Department guidelines.

19.5 All MSDS documents required by Federal and State law shall be kept available on

site in the contractor’s trailer or office.

19.6 All hazardous material and waste shall be secured, contained (secondary containment

as necessary), labeled properly and used or disposed of in accordance with local, State and

Federal regulations.

19.7 The contractor shall be responsible for spill containment, clean up and any other

associated costs resulting from an illicit discharge of hazardous materials or waste. The

contractor shall review, understand and follow the Districts illicit discharge reporting

procedures.

GC 20. CHANGED CONDITIONS

20.1 The Contractor shall promptly, and before such conditions are disturbed, notify the

Owner and the Architect in writing of: (1)sub-surface or latent physical conditions at the site

differing materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents, or (2)unknown physical

conditions at the site, of an unusual nature, differing materially from those ordinarily

encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the

Contract Documents. The Owner and the Architect shall promptly investigate the conditions,

and if the Owner finds that such conditions do so materially differ and cause an increase or

decrease in the cost of, or the time required for, performance of the work, an equitable

adjustment shall be made and the Contract modified in writing accordingly. Any claim of the

Contractor for adjustment hereunder shall not be allowed unless Contractor has given notice

as above required, shall be subject to the Owner’s approval and shall be made in writing to

the Owner no more than seven (7) calendar days after the identification of the conditions;

otherwise they shall be waived.

GC 21. CORRECTION OF WORK

21.1 Correction of Work Before and After Completion. The Architect or Owner has the

authority to condemn work which is defective or does not conform to the Contract

Documents. The Contractor, following written demand, shall promptly correct all work

rejected by the Architect or Owner as defective or as failing to conform to the Contract

Documents whether observed before or after final completion and whether or not fabricated,

installed, or completed. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected work,

including the cost of the Architect's and/or Owner's consultant's additional services. If the

Contractor proceeds to build in or cover the item which has been rejected, they shall be

totally responsible for the cost of removal and replacement of said item and removal and

replacement of all necessary work surrounding or covering the item in order to produce a

first-class job.

21.2 Tests to Determine Conformance. Whenever in the opinion of the Architect or the

Owner, tests are essential to assure the professional evaluation of the work which is subject

to being rejected or condemned, the necessary number of tests will be performed by the

consultants designated by the Owner. The recommendation of this consultant is final and all

parties to the Contract will comply with the methods and extent of the corrections submitted



in writing to the Owner and the Architect by the designated consultant. The cost of the tests

will become the Contractor's responsibility when corrections of any nature are recommended

by the consultant to the investigated work; otherwise, the Owner will pay for all tests

performed. Should such special testing, inspection, or approval be caused by the Contractor's

failure to follow the requirements of the Contract Documents or of required tests under GC

15 testing indicating conditions not in conformance with the Contract Documents, the costs

of such additional testing, inspection, or approval shall be borne by the Contractor, regardless

of the results.

21.3 Removal of Rejected Work. The Contractor shall promptly remove from the

premises all work rejected by the Architect or Owner as failing to conform to the Contract

Documents whether physically in place or not. Thereafter, the Contractor shall promptly

replace and re-execute such work in accordance with the Contract and without expense to the

Owner. The Contractor shall further bear the expense of making good all work of other

subcontractors found to be defective or destroyed or damaged by such removal or

replacement.

21.3.1 If the Contractor does not remove such rejected work within a reasonable time, fixed

by written notice from the Owner through the Architect, the Owner may remove it and

may store the material at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay

the expenses of such removal within ten (10) days' time thereafter, the Owner may, upon

ten (10) days' written notice, sell such materials at auction or at private sale. In such

case, the Owner shall account to the Contractor for the net proceeds thereof, after

deducting all the costs and expenses that should have been borne by the Contractor,

including compensation for additional Architect or consultant services. If the net

proceeds of sale do not cover all costs which the Contractor should have borne, the

difference shall be charged to the Contractor and an appropriate change order shall be

issued. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover

such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.

21.4 Correction of Work After Final Payment. Neither the final estimate nor payment nor

any provision in the Contract Documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for

faulty materials or workmanship and, unless otherwise specified, they shall remedy any

defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work or property resulting therefrom,

which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final completion and

acceptance. This warranty shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other remedies

available to the Owner.

21.5 Failure to Correct the Work. If the Contractor fails to correct such defective or

nonconforming work, the Owner may correct it and otherwise proceed against the Contractor

for the cost thereof in accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions.

21.6 Deductions for Uncorrected Work. If the Owner deems it inexpedient to correct work

that has been damaged or is defective or has not been completed in accordance with the

Contract Documents, an appropriate deduction from the Contract price shall be made and

reflected by a change order, or, if the amount is determined after final payment, it shall be

paid by the Contractor.

21.7 Additional Obligations. The obligations of the Contractor to correct the work shall be

in addition to, and not in limitation of, any other obligations imposed upon them by law,

special guarantees, warranties, or other rights of the Owner.



GC 22. OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT WORK

22.1 If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any

provision of this Contract, the Owner, after three (3) working days' written notice to the

Contractor, may, without prejudice to any other remedy they may have, make good such

deficiencies and may deduct the reasonable cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter

due the Contractor. In the event such work is performed by the Owner, the Owner's

employees, or by persons other than the Contractor at the Owner's request, the Owner shall

not be liable to the Contractor for inconvenience expense or subsequent cost of removal of

such work. The amount to be deducted as cost of doing the work shall include the cost of the

Architect's additional services made necessary by such default. If the payments then or

thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay

the difference to the Owner.

GC 23. OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT

23.1 With Cause. If the Contractor should fail to perform the work with reasonable and

due diligence or refuse to supply sufficient skilled works or materials of the proper quality, or

should the contractor be adjudged a bankrupt; or it should make a general assignment for the

benefit of its creditors without approval of the Owner; or if a receiver should be appointed on

account of its insolvency; or if it should refuse or should fail, except in cases for which

extension of time is provided; or if it should fail to make prompt payment to subcontractors

or for material or labor; or disregard laws, ordinances, or the instructions of the Architect or

Owner; or otherwise be guilty of a material violation of any provision of the Contract; then

the Owner, when in its sole opinion sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may,

without prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the Contractor, and his surety,

if any, seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take

possession of the premises and of all materials, tools, and appliances thereon and finish the

work by whatever method the Owner may deem expedient. In such case the Contractor shall

not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finally completed and

accepted by the Owner. If the unpaid balance of the Contract sum shall exceed the expense

of completing the work, including compensation for additional architectural, managerial,

consultant, and administrative services, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such

expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the

Owner. The expense incurred by the Owner, as herein provided, and the damages incurred

through the Contractor's default, shall be determined by the Owner.

23.2 Without Cause. Should conditions arise which in the Owner's opinion make it

necessary or advisable to discontinue work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may

terminate the Contract in whole or in part without cause or fault by the Contractor by giving

seven (7) calendar days' written notice to the Contractor. The notice shall specify the date

and extent to which the Contract is terminated. Upon any such termination, the Owner shall

take possession of the site and all or any part of the materials and equipment delivered or

en route to the site. In the event of termination under this paragraph the Contractor shall be

equitably paid for all work properly completed, based upon the approved Schedules of

Values.



GC 24. PAYMENT

24.1 Schedule of Values. Payments will be made on the valuation of the work done.

Before any Request for Payment will be considered, the Contractor shall submit to the

Architect and the Owner a complete, itemized schedule of the values of the various parts of

the work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract and separating material costs from other

costs. Such schedule shall include as costs the material costs of all subcontractors under such

Contractor and the costs of all materials to be taken from the Contractor's or subcontractors'

own stocks of material. The schedule shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner

and, if required, supported by such evidence as to its correctness as the Architect or the

Owner may direct. Each item on the schedule of values shall include its proper share of

overhead and profit. This schedule will be used for the estimates and payments provided for

in these General Conditions. Along with such schedule the Contractor shall submit a

schedule of values of estimated monthly application amounts for the course of the work to

assist the Owner in arranging payment.

24.2 Payments to Contractors. Partial payments will be made as the work progresses

within fifteen (15) days of the Owner’s receipt of the Application for Payment of Contractor,

which is properly completed and has been approved by the Architect. If the Owner has an

issue with or does not approve the Application for Payment of Contractor, the Owner will

notify the contractor in writing. Request for Payment shall be submitted to the Architect on a

regularly established monthly schedule approved by the Owner. The Owner reserves the

right to withhold payments at any time regardless of the Architect's recommendations. The

Request for Payment shall be based on the same items as are shown in the schedule of values

itemizing the material used and work performed for which payment is claimed. In preparing

estimates, material delivered and properly stored on the site and preparatory work done may

be taken into consideration.

24.2.1 If payments are made on account of materials not incorporated in the work, but

delivered and suitably stored at the site, or at some other location that is bonded and

insured and agreed upon in writing, such payments shall be conditioned upon submission

by the Contractor of bills of sale or such other procedures which will establish the

Owner's interest, including applicable insurance and transportation to the site.

24.2.1.1 Off site stored material must be made available for inspection by owner,

architect, consultants and/or contractor prior to pay applications being approved.

24.2.1.2 Material must be clearly identified as property of owner, and stored in a

manner as to be easily distinguished from general inventory. This may include the

actual development of an area that can be fenced off from other inventory.

24.2.1.3 Request for payment will include all applicable invoices, a bill of sale and a

certificate of insurance which states the dollar amount of the stored material. All

dollar amounts on invoices, the bill of sale and the insurance certificates shall match

exactly the amount being billed for on the application.. The insurance certificate

must also name the owner as additionally insured.

24.2.1.4 When requested by owner or architect, general contractor will set up the

inspection meeting and general contractor will be present at inspection.

24.2.1.5 Payment applications for shop drawings will be allowed, but not approved for

payment until the shop drawings have been submitted to architect, approved by both

architect and owner and all corrections have been completed..



24.2.2 Payments will be made in the full value of the work performed and material stored

less ten percent (10%) of such value which shall be retained until completion and

acceptance of all work, unless otherwise agreed by Owner, and less the aggregate of any

previous payments. Upon the certified completion of fifty percent (50%) of the work, as

determined by the Architect and the Owner, and if satisfactory progress is being made in

the work, in the sole opinion of the Owner, then no retainage shall be made from further

monthly payments, subject to any retainages made by the Owner from the final payment.

The full Contract retainage may be reinstated if the manner of completion of the work

and its progress do not remain satisfactory to the Owner. Upon satisfactory completion

and final acceptance of each separate building or portion of the building or other division

of the Contract upon which agreement has been reached as to its separate price, the

Owner may make payment in full, including retained percentages thereon less deductions

as determined by the Owner. Before such payment is made, the Owner shall determine

that satisfactory and substantial reasons exist for the payment and shall require written

approval from any surety furnishing bonds for the work. Partial and final payments by

the Contractor to their subcontractors shall be made in the same manner as provided

herein between the Owner and the Contractor.

24.2.3 Under any Contract exceeding Eighty Thousand Dollars ($80,000), pursuant to which

sums are withheld to assure satisfactory performance, the Contractor may withdraw the

whole or any portion of such sums withheld if the Contractor deposits acceptable

securities with the Owner in an amount at all times at least equal to the amount

withdrawn. All such withdrawals shall be on the Owner's approved forms and shall

require that the acceptable securities be endorsed in favor of the Owner, authorizing the

Owner to negotiate the acceptable securities and to receive the payments due.

24.2.4 The Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all work, materials, and

equipment covered by a Request for Payment, whether incorporated in the project or not,

will pass to the Owner upon the receipt of such payment by the Contractor, free and clear

of all liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances; and that no work, materials, or

equipment covered by a Request for Payment will have been acquired by the Contractor

or by any other person performing the work at the site or furnishing materials and

equipment for the project, subject to an agreement under which an interest therein or an

encumbrance thereon is retained by the seller or otherwise imposed by the Contractor or

such other person. This provision shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from

the sole responsibility for all materials and work upon which payments have been made

or the restoration of any damaged work or as a waiver of the right of the Owner to require

the fulfillment of all the terms of the Contract.

24.3 Certificates for Payments. No Request for Payment shall be submitted to the Owner

until and unless it has been certified by the Architect. No Certificate for a progress payment,

nor any progress payment, nor any partial or entire use or occupancy of the project by the

Owner shall constitute an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the

Contract Documents.

24.4 Payments Withheld. The Owner may withhold payment or the Architect may decline

to issue a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, or the Architect may withhold or

nullify the whole or any part of any Certificate previously issued, because of subsequently

discovered evidence or subsequent inspections, for such an amount or to such extent as may

be necessary in the opinion of either to protect the Owner from loss on account of:



24.4.1 Defective work not remedied;

24.4.2 Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims;

24.4.3 Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to subcontractors or material or

labor;

24.4.4 A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance then unpaid;

24.4.5 Damage to another contractor;

24.4.6 Failure of the Contractor to prosecute any portion of the work in a timely manner or

in compliance with any approved schedules;

24.4.7 Failure of the Contractor to submit on a timely basis any documentation required by

the Contract Documents, including, without limitation, monthly schedule status updates,

schedule of values, or request for approval of subcontractors.

GC 25. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND PROGRESS REPORTS

25.1 The Contractor shall submit, prior to Notice to Proceed in a format acceptable to the

Owner, a construction schedule for the project. This schedule shall start with the date of the

Notice of Contract Award, and the completion date shall be the date specified in the

Construction Agreement. The schedule shall portray fully a timetable representing the

various activities in the schedule of values and shall include submittal schedule and long lead

material activities. The contractors schedule shall include activity dependencies and logic to

clearly indicate the projects Critical Path activities. The time shown between the starting and

completion dates of the various activities within the schedule shall represent one hundred

percent (100%) completion of each activity. Additional detailed schedules of separate

activities of work may be requested at the Owner's discretion. No Request for Payment will

be accepted by the Owner until this schedule has been submitted as required herein. This

schedule shall be revised at a minimum every month during the progress of the work or when

the actual progress, in the opinion of the Architect or the Owner, varies materially from the

last monthly schedule status update. At each weekly Owner, Architect, Contractor meeting

the contractor is required to present a 3 week short interval schedule detailing the up coming

work.

25.2 The Contractor shall submit with their “Application of Payment for Contractor” the

monthly statused schedule reflecting the work in place. The monthly statused schedule shall

depict progress and percentage of completion of activities consistent with the values and

amounts contained in the “Application of Payment for Contractor”. The contractors

subcontractors shall be supplied copies of the accepted schedule. Failure to submit a

monthly statused schedule update shall be deemed cause to reject Requests for Payment.

25.3 The Contractor shall schedule all work so as to reduce to a minimum any disruption

in the use of the existing facilities and interruptions of utility service of any type. Where

electrical or mechanical work performed under this Contract will necessitate interruptions of

service to existing facilities, the Contractor shall furnish and install temporary service to such

facilities or perform such work at such times when said existing utilities are not in normal

use. This Contractor shall bear the cost of all overtime or inconvenience resulting therefrom.

25.4 During the course of construction the Contractor shall maintain free and unimpeded

all required exits from the building. Barricades shall be so erected that traffic is separated

and protected from the construction. Such exits shall not be closed at any time for any reason



while the building is occupied or at any time when the building is unoccupied except after

written approval is given by the Owner and proper warning and directional signs are posted.

GC 26. INSURANCE

26.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain, without interruption, throughout the term

of the Contract and for a period of one (1) year following the date of Final Acceptance of the

Work, such insurance as will protect him from claims set forth below which may arise out of

or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract, whether such operations be by

himself or by any subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,

or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. All such insurance shall be subject to

the approval of the Owner for adequacy of protection, and, to the extent available, shall

include a provision preventing cancellation without thirty (30) days' prior notice to the

Owner in writing.

26.2 Liability Insurance Requirements. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at his

own expense, liability insurance as hereinafter specified. The liability insurance required is

as follows:

26.2.1 Contractor's General Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance issued to the

Contractor and protecting him from all claims for personal injury, including death and

occupational sickness and disease, and all claims for destruction of or damage to property

arising out of or in connection with any operations under his Contract, whether such

operations be by himself or by a subcontractor under him, or anyone directly or indirectly

employed by the Contractor or by a subcontractor under him, or by anyone for whose acts

any of them may be liable.

26.2.1.1 All such insurance shall be written with a limit of liability of not less than

$2,000,000 for all damages arising out of bodily injury, including death, at any time

resulting therefrom, and property damage and employer's liability up to $2,000,000.

26.2.1.2 All such insurance shall be written on a comprehensive policy form and shall

specifically cover all blasting operations, elevators, products, completed operations,

explosions, collapse, subsidence, and underground damage. Certificates evidencing

the issuance of such insurance, addressed to the Owner, shall be filed with the Owner

within ten (10) days after the date of the Notice of Contract Award.

26.2.2 The policy shall name Owner as additional insured and shall be endorsed to be

primary and non-contributory for Owner. Coverage shall not exclude contractual or

products and completed operations liability, nor liability for explosions, collapse or

underground risks. Coverage shall remain in force for a period of One (1) year from the

date of Final Acceptance of the Work. The parties hereto understand and agree that the

additional insured Owner is relying on and does not waive or intend to waive by this

Contract any provision hereof, including the provision of this section, the monetary

limitations, or any other rights, immunities, and protections provided by the Colorado

24-10-101 et seq., as from time to time amended,

or otherwise available to the Owner.

26.3 During the term of the Contract and for a period of one (1) year following the date of

Final Acceptance of the Work, the Contractor shall not cancel or refuse to renew the liability

insurance required above without the written approval of the Owner, which approval may be

withheld at the sole discretion of the Owner. With each Request for Payment submitted by



the Contractor, the Contractor shall submit an updated and current certificate of insurance or

other evidence, to the reasonable satisfaction of the Owner, evidencing the liability insurance

coverage required herein. The Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately upon receipt of

any notice from the insurer of any cancellation, termination, or non-renewal of the policy.

26.4 Worker's Compensation Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain at his own

expense, until completion of the work and final acceptance thereof by the Owner, Worker's

Compensation Insurance, including occupational disease provisions, covering the obligations

of the Contractor in accordance with the provisions of the laws of the State of Colorado and

Employer's Liability of not less than $100,000 per occurrence and $100,000/disease for each

employee. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certificate giving evidence that the

Contractor is covered by the Worker's Compensation Insurance herein required, each

certificate specifically stating that such insurance includes occupational disease provisions.

All such certificates shall be furnished within ten (10) days after the date of the Notice of

Award.

26.5 Builder's Risk Completed Value Insurance. The Owner shall pay for and maintain

Builder's Risk Completed Value Insurance, insuring property of every kind and description to

be incorporated into the work, including materials and supplies, used or to be used, as part of

or incidental to the construction operations. The insurance shall exclude the Contractor's and

its subcontractors' equipment, tools, and machinery, or any other items of any description that

are not incorporated into the work. Faulty workmanship shall also be excluded. The

Builder's Risk Insurance shall provide coverage against physical loss or damage caused by

fire, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, and "extended coverages." The insurance

shall include a minimum deductible of $5,000. The Contractor shall pay costs not covered

because of such deductibles. The Builder's Risk Insurance shall remain in effect until

12:00 noon on the day following the date of the final acceptance of the entire project,

whether or not the project or some part thereof is occupied in any manner prior to such final

acceptance.

26.5.1 A loss insured under the Owner's Builder's Risk Insurance shall be adjusted by the

Owner and made payable to the Owner on behalf of the Contractor and its subcontractors

as their interests may appear. The Contractor shall pay subcontractors their just portions

of any insurance proceeds received by the Owner and paid to the Contractor.

26.5.2 Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, in writing, all monies received shall be applied

toward rebuilding or repairing the destroyed or damaged work.

26.5.3 The Contractor and his subcontractors and suppliers waive all rights against the

Owner for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by the Builder's

Risk Insurance obtained pursuant to this section or other property insurance applicable to

the work, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by

the Owner on their behalf. The Contractor shall require similar waivers of his

subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents, and employees of any of them.

26.6 Comprehensive Automobile Liability. The Contractor shall pay for and maintain

Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance, including owned, non owned, and hired

vehicles in the following amounts:

26.6.1 Bodily Injury and Property Damage: $2,000,000

26.7 Insurance Companies. The Owner will accept the policies written only by sureties

legally authorized in the State of Colorado and rated in Best's Insurance Guide (latest

edition), not lower than A- or have a Best's Financial Rating of at least X.



GC 27. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS

27.1 The Contractor shall, within ten (10) days of the Notice of Contract Award, furnish

bonds to the Owner in the full amount of the Contract price, covering both the faithful

performance of the Contract and the payment of all obligations for labor and materials arising

thereunder, on such forms as the Owner may prescribe and with such sureties as he may

approve. Such bonds shall be duly executed by a qualified surety, conditioned upon the true

and faithful performance of the Contract, and shall provide that if the Contractor or his

subcontractors fail to duly pay for any labor, materials, or other supplies used or consumed

by such Contractor or their subcontractors in the performance of the work contracted to be

done, the surety will pay the same in an amount not exceeding the sum specified in the bond,

as adjusted by approved change orders, and together with interest as provided by law. The

Performance Bond shall additionally guarantee that the Contractor shall remedy any

omissions, correct any and all defects, and adjust and make operable all component parts of

the work falling under the requirements of his Contract which may be called to his attention

within a period of twelve (12) months following the date of the Letter of Acceptance.

27.2 The premium for all bonds shall be paid by the Contractor and included in the bid

price in the Bid Proposal. The Owner will accept and approve bonds written by sureties

legally authorized to write such bonds in the State of Colorado, provided such surety

companies are rated in Best's Insurance Guide (latest edition), not lower that A- or have a

Best's Financial Rating of at least X. If, at any time a surety on such a bond becomes

irresponsible or loses its right to do business in the State of Colorado, the Owner may require

another surety acceptable to the Owner, which the Contractor shall furnish within ten (10)

days after receipt of written notice to do so.

27.3 Subcontractors pre-qualified by the Owner, prior to bidding, that enter into a

subcontractor agreement with the Contractor for any portion of the work, shall provide the

Contractor with Performance and Payment Bonds in accordance with the Contract

Documents on the basis of their subcontract scope of work to the Contractor.

27.4 The Contractor shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on

behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney.

GC 28. SUBCONTRACTS

28.1 The Contractor shall, within twenty-four (24) hours following the bid opening,

provide to the Owner the entire list of subcontractors and suppliers of labor and materials

whose quotations it has used in preparation of its bid. The Contractor shall, before awarding

any subcontracts, re-verify to the Owner and Architect in writing on the standard form

"Request for Approval of Subcontractors" the names of subcontractors proposed for the

project. Any deviation from the original subcontractor and supplier list will not be allowed

unless justification is submitted in writing to the Owner by the Contractor that the

subcontractor or supplier is deemed unfit or unable to perform the specified work, is

unwilling to enter into a subcontract, or is not in compliance with the Contract Documents.

The Contractor shall not employ any subcontractors that the Owner or Architect may, within

a reasonable time, object to as incompetent, unfit, or otherwise undesirable. Substitutions of



subcontractors listed in the executed proposal form may not be made without written

approval of the Owner.

28.2 If, before or after the execution of the Contract, a change of any subcontractor on

such list is required by the Architect or by the Owner prior to the award of the relevant

contract, the contract sum may be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned

by such change and an appropriate change order shall be issued.

28.3 The Owner shall, on request, furnish to a subcontractor, wherever practicable,

evidence of the amounts certified on his account. The Contractor agrees that he is as fully

responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of his subcontractors and of persons

either directly or indirectly employed by them, as he is for the acts and omissions of persons

directly employed by him.

28.4 The Contractor, at the conclusion of the work and before final payment is made, shall

furnish to the Owner a listing, giving names, contact persons, addresses, and telephone

numbers of all subcontractors and material suppliers who furnished labor and materials on

the project with identification of the services rendered and materials provided.

28.5 Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any direct contractual

relation between any subcontractor and the Owner.

GC 29. RELATIONS OF CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR

29.1 The Contractor agrees to bind every subcontractor by a written agreement and require

in his contracts that every subcontractor be bound by the terms of the Construction

Agreement, the General Conditions of the Contract, the Supplementary General Conditions,

the drawings and specifications as far as applicable to his work, including the following

provisions of this Article, unless specifically noted to the contrary in a subcontract approved

in writing as adequate by the Owner.

29.2 The subcontractor agrees with the Contractor:

29.2.1 To be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Construction Agreement, General

Conditions of the Contract, the Supplementary General Conditions, the drawings and

specifications, and any other Contract Documents, and to assume toward him all the

obligations and responsibilities that he, by those documents, assumes toward the Owner;

29.2.2 To preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Architect under the Contract

with respect to the work to be performed under the subcontract so that the subcontracting

thereof will not prejudice such rights;

29.2.3 To perform all work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents;

29.2.4 To submit to the Contractor applications for payment in such reasonable time as to

enable the Contractor to apply for payment as specified in the General Conditions;

29.2.5 To make all claims for extras, for extensions of time, and for damages for delays or

otherwise, to the Contractor in the manner provided in the General Conditions of the

Contract and the Supplementary General Conditions for like claims by the Contractor

upon the Owner, except that the time for making claims for extra cost is one week.

29.3 The Contractor agrees:

29.3.1 To be bound to the subcontractor by all the obligations that the Owner assumes to the

Contractor under the Agreement, General Conditions of the Contract, the Supplementary

General Conditions, the drawings and specifications, and by all the provisions thereof

affording remedies and redress to the Contractor from the Owner.



29.3.2 To pay the subcontractor not later than fourteen (14) calendar days immediately

following the payment of each certificate issued under the schedule of values described in

these General Conditions, the amount allowed to the Contractor on account of the

subcontractor's work to the extent of the subcontractor's interest therein.

29.3.3 To pay the subcontractor, upon the payment of Certificates, if issued otherwise than

as above, so that at all times his total payments shall be as large in proportion to the value

of the work done by him as the total amount certified to the Contractor is to the value of

the work done by him.

29.3.4 To pay the subcontractor to such extent as may be provided by the Contract

Documents or the subcontract, if either of these provides for earlier or larger payments

than the above.

29.3.5 To pay the subcontractor a just share of any insurance payment received by the

Contractor, applicable to work performed by such subcontractor.

29.4 The Owner may require the Contractor to submit verified documentation evidencing

that full and timely payments have been made to the subcontractors and suppliers and/or that

legal justification exists for withholding payments. In addition, the Owner may contact the

subcontractors and suppliers directly to obtain verification that payments have been made as

required by law or the Contract Documents.

29.5 Nothing in this Article shall create any obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or

to see to the payment of any sums to any subcontractor, nor shall it form the basis for any

action by the subcontractor against the Owner on any contractual theories.

29.6 The Contractor shall arrange for the foreman of each subcontractor (mechanical,

electrical, masonry, plastering, painting, etc.) on the job to meet with the Architect at the job

prior to any work being started by this particular subcontractor so that all phases of the

subcontractor's work can be thoroughly discussed and the quality of materials and

workmanship expected can be completely understood and agreed upon.

GC 30. ARCHITECT'S STATUS AND INSPECTIONS

30.1 Authority. The Architect shall be the Owner's representative during construction and

until the expiration of the warranty period. He shall have authority to act on behalf of the

Owner only to the extent expressly provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise in

writing. The Architect, with written approval of the Owner, shall have authority to stop the

work whenever such stoppage may be necessary in his reasonable opinion to ensure the

proper execution of the Contract.

30.2 Decisions. The Architect shall be, in the first instance, the interpreter of the

conditions of the Contract and the judge of its performance, although the Owner shall retain

the final authority in decisions regarding such matters. The Architect shall, within a

reasonable time, make recommendations on all claims of the Contractor and on all other

matters relating to the execution and progress of the work. All such decisions shall be

subject to review by the Owner. The Architect's decisions in matters relating to artistic

effect, after consultation with the Owner, shall be final, if within the terms of the Contract

Documents.

30.3 Inspections. The Contractor shall provide timely notice to the Architect when

inspections are desirable or required by the terms of the Contract Documents or the



Architect's Agreement with the Owner. Such notice shall be given in order to allow for the

following reviews and inspections, among others:

30.3.1 Reviewing and approving shop drawings samples and other submissions for

conformance with the design concept of the project and for compliance with the

information given in the Contract Documents;

30.3.2 Inspection of bearing surfaces of excavations before footings are poured;

30.3.3 Inspection of reinforcing steel after installation and before concrete is placed;

30.3.4 Inspection of structural and architectural concrete before, during, and after pouring;

30.3.5 Evaluation of all laboratory reports;

30.3.6 Inspection of structural steel after erection and prior to its being covered or enclosed;

30.3.7 Inspection of mechanical work following its installation and prior to its being covered

and enclosed;

30.3.8 Inspection of electrical work following its installation and prior to its being covered

or enclosed; and

30.3.9 Inspection of exposed surfaces for compliance with the Construction Documents.

GC 31. CASH ALLOWANCES

31.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract sum all allowances stated in the Contract

Documents. These allowances shall cover the net cost of the materials and equipment

delivered and unloaded at the site, and all applicable taxes. The Contractor's handling costs

on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the

original allowance shall be included in the Contract sum and not in the allowance. The

Contractor shall cause the work covered by these allowances to be performed for such

amounts and by such persons as the Owner or Architect may direct, but they will not be

required to employ persons against whom he makes a reasonable objection. If the cost, when

determined, is more than or less than the allowance, the Contract sum shall be adjusted

accordingly by change order which will include additional handling costs on the site, labor,

installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses resulting to the Contractor from any

increase over the original allowance.

GC 32. USE OF PREMISES

32.1 The Contractor shall confine their apparatus, the storage of materials, and the

operations of workers to limits indicated by law, ordinances, permits, and the Contract

Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with their materials. The

Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the structure to be loaded with a weight that

will endanger its safety. The Contractor shall enforce all Owner instructions and other

regulations regarding signs, advertisements, fires, and smoking and shall not allow the

possession or consumption of alcohol or drugs on the premises by their personnel or any

subcontractor personnel.



GC 33. CUTTING, PATCHING, AND EXCAVATING

33.1 The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, or patching of the work that may be

required to make its several parts come together properly and fit it to receive or be received

by work of the subcontractors shown upon, or reasonably implied by, the drawings and

specifications for the completed structure.

33.2 Any cost caused by defective or improperly timed work shall be borne by the party

responsible therefor. The Contractor shall not endanger any work by cutting, excavating, or

otherwise altering the work and shall not cut or alter the work of any subcontractor except

with the consent of the Architect.

33.3 Each subcontractor shall leave all chases, holes, or openings straight, true, and of

proper size in their own work, or cut the same in existing work as may be necessary for the

proper installation of their own or another subcontractor's work, consulting with the

Architect and the Contractor regarding proper location and size of same. In case of their

failure to leave or cut same in the proper place, they shall cut them afterward at their own

expense. No excessive cutting will be permitted, nor shall any piers or other structural

members be cut or modified in the field without the written consent of the Architect. After

such work has been installed, they shall carefully fit around, close up, repair, patch, and point

up same as directed to the entire satisfaction of the Architect. Each section of this

specification shall include all cutting, patching, and excavating for that trade division unless

specifically stated to the contrary.

GC 34. CLEANING UP

34.1 The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulations of waste

material or rubbish caused by their employees or work, and shall remove all rubbish as often

as is necessary or as directed by the Owner or the Architect. At the completion of the work,

he shall remove all his rubbish from and about the building, and all his tools, scaffolding, and

surplus materials and shall wash all glazing and window frames inside and outside

throughout the building, removing all stains, paint, etc., on same. Care shall be taken not to

scratch the glazing in this clean up.

34.2 All doors and wall coverings shall be left thoroughly clean and finished; all walls and

ledges shall be dusted; all plumbing fixtures shall be cleaned; all hardware shall be free of all

labels, paint, stains, dust, dirt, and the like; all marks, stains, fingerprints, other oil, and dirt

shall be removed from painted, decorated, or natural finish work and the building will be

ready for occupancy except for being further equipped by the Owner. In case of dispute, the

Owner may perform such cleaning up as may be required and charge the cost to the

Contractor.

GC 35. STATUTES, ORDINANCES, AND REGULATIONS

35.1 The Contractor and all subcontractors shall comply with all applicable federal and

state statutes, rules, regulations, and directives of the State Department of Labor, Safety

Inspection Branch, or any other governmental body having jurisdiction over the work to be

performed. Should any of the provisions of the Contract Documents be in conflict therewith,

then that portion which is in conflict shall be considered stricken and the applicable statute,



ordinance, regulation, or ruling substituted therefor. All such cases of apparent conflict

coming to the attention of any party shall immediately be called to the attention of the

Owner. The Contractor shall strictly observe and comply with all federal and state laws

pertaining to the employment and payment of labor.

GC 36. SALES AND USE TAX

36.1 The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner to ascertain whether a sales or use

tax may be collectible on the purchase of building materials, supplies, and equipment used

for this project by the Contractor. Some cities and municipalities will charge a sales or use

tax on building materials, supplies, and equipment "picked up" and/or used within that city or

municipality by a contractor. Whenever possible, the Contractor shall have building

materials, supplies, and equipment for this project delivered to the construction site by

common carrier, conveyance by the seller, or by mail to avoid city or municipal sales and use

taxes for which refunds will not be made. The Owner is exempt from the payment of any

State sales and State use taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment used upon this project

by the Contractor and subcontractors. For the purpose of exercising such exemption, the

Contractor and all their subcontractors shall apply for and obtain a Certificate of Exemption

for the work from the Colorado Department of Revenue. A copy of such Certificates shall be

filed with the Owner before any materials are purchased or any work commenced hereunder.

GC 37. APPROVAL OF SUBSTITUTIONS

37.1 The Contractor will be held to have used in his base proposal and to furnish under the

Contract those items of equipment and/or materials which are specifically identified in the

specifications by a manufacturer's name, model, or catalog number. Items of equipment of

the Contractor's choice may be offered as alternates to the items named in the specifications

by submitting with the proposal and on the form provided, identifying data on the articles

proposed, together with a statement of the amount of addition or deduction from the base bid

if the bidder's alternate is accepted. Prior approval by the Architect is not required on items

submitted as alternate bids. After execution of the Contract, substitution of equipment and/or

materials of makes other than those specifically named in the Contract Documents may be

approved by the Owner so long as the equipment or material proposed for substitution in the

opinion of the Owner is just as suitable as equipment and/or materials named in the

specifications so far as performance, construction, efficiency, and utility are concerned. A

request for substitution shall ordinarily be required to be based upon one or more of the

following grounds for justification: the submitted material is no longer available, a

substitution will improve lead time, quality will be improved (documented detail required),

or the Owner will incur substantial savings. All requests for substitution must be submitted

in writing with supporting documentation by or through the Contractor to the Architect for

initial review, before being submitted to the Owner for evaluation and final approval. In the

absence of the Owner's written approval, no substitution of materials or methods will be

allowed for any items specified in the Contract Documents.

37.2 In case of a difference in price, occurring as a result of an approved substitution, the

Owner shall receive all benefit of the difference in cost involved in the substitution. All



approved substitutions will be documented by the issuance of a formal change order as

provided in these General Conditions.

GC 38. OCCUPANCY

38.1 The Contractor, upon the Owner's written request, shall allow the Owner to occupy

portions of the work and to place and install, subject to reasonable restrictions, as much

equipment and furnishings during the progress of the work as is possible without interfering

with the progress of the work. Such occupancy and the placing or installing of equipment

and furnishings shall not in any way evidence the completion of the work or signify the

Owner's acceptance of the work, or any part of it. Equipment includes such things as kitchen

equipment, etc. Furnishings include such things as lockers, benches, desks, etc. Prior to

occupancy, when practicable, the Architect shall make a thorough inspection accompanied by

the Contractor's superintendent to note any defects in workmanship or materials which are

the responsibility of the Contractor. The provisions of the Article shall not be in limitation of

the Owner's rights set forth in GC 18, claims for extra cost or additional time, herein.

GC 39. DAMAGE TO UTILITIES

39.1 The Contractor shall take adequate precautions to protect existing utilities on and off

the site and avoid damage thereto. The Contractor shall repair or replace or have repaired or

replaced at their own expense any damage to streets, water, sewer, light, power, cable, or

telephone lines, damaged by reason of their work.

39.2 The location and extent of underground utilities and cables and conduit as indicated

on the drawings are not guaranteed. This information is shown only for such use as bidders

and Contractors may choose to make of it. All Contractors shall check with all public

utilities companies for locations and shall comply with their regulations regarding their

utilities in performing the work.

39.3 Active underground utilities shall be adequately protected from damage and if

damaged shall be immediately repaired. Removal or relocation of same shall be done only as

indicated on the drawings. If they are in use, they shall be maintained in continuous service.

If not indicated on the drawings or not known to exist, the Contractor shall report discovery

of such lines to the Architect and shall not proceed further until directed to do so.

39.4 Inactive or abandoned utilities, whether or not they are indicated on the drawings,

shall be recorded as to location and depth and shall be removed for a distance of not less that

three (3) feet from outside line of all concrete work unless otherwise required by regulations.

Ends shall be capped or plugged. There will be no adjustment of Contract amount for work

due to inactive or abandoned utilities.

GC 40. PROJECT SIGN

40.1 If required by the specifications, the Contractor shall provide a project sign. No other

advertising is permitted on the project site.



GC 41. BLASTING

41.1 No explosives of any nature except for those normally employed in powder actuated

tools, .38 caliber or smaller, shall be employed or used on any site except with the express

and specific prior written approval of the Architect and the Owner and any appropriate

governmental authorities, in each instance. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of need

for such approval three (3) days prior to the proposed use of such explosives.

GC 42. HISTORICAL DATA

42.1 In addition to warranties, guarantees, operating instructions, etc., elsewhere specified,

the Contractor, at the conclusion of the work and before final payment is made, shall furnish

a listing, giving principal's names, addresses, and telephone numbers of all subcontractors

and material suppliers who furnished labor or materials on the job with identification of the

services rendered. There shall be provided one (1) copy for the Architect and two (2) copies

for the Owner. All copies shall be delivered to the Architect for review and distribution.

GC 43. TESTING OF BUILDING SYSTEMS

43.1 The Contractor shall submit a written plan prior to completion and acceptance,

consistent with the Contract Documents and applicable codes, for the testing of all building

systems. All testing shall be of the complete system, before covering, or of individually

separable larger portions of the system and shall be performed in the presence of the

appropriate consultant and representative of the Owner. A written report shall be filed in the

office of Construction Management, Jefferson County School District No. R-1, recording

each test, and signed by such consultant.

GC 44. TEMPORARY OR TRIAL USAGE

44.1 Temporary or trial usage by the Owner of any mechanical device, machinery,

apparatus, equipment, or any work or material supplied under the Contract before final

completion and written acceptance by the Architect shall not be construed as evidence of the

Architect's or Owner's acceptance of same or the commencement of any warranty periods.

44.2 The Owner has the privilege of such temporary or trial usage, for such reasonable

time as the Owner and the Architect deem proper. The Contractor shall make no claim for

damage or injury to or breaking of any parts of such work which may be caused by weakness

or inaccuracy of structural parts or by defective materials or workmanship. If the Contractor

so elects, they may, without cost to the Owner, make such trial usage. However, trials shall

only be conducted with the Architect's prior approval and under their observation.

44.3 When heating, air conditioning, ventilating, exhaust, or other items of electrical or

other equipment are installed, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor installing such

equipment to operate it for a satisfactory period of time as required by the Architect for

proper testing of the equipment and instructing the Owner's operating personnel. All items of

equipment, testing meters, testing instruments, and incidentals required for proper testing and

for instructing the Owner's operating personnel, shall be provided by the Contractor

responsible for providing and installing the equipment.



GC 45. ASSIGNMENT

45.1 Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole without

the written consent of the other, nor shall the Contractor assign any moneys due or to become

due to them hereunder, without the previous written consent of the Owner.

GC 46. SEPARATE CONTRACTS

46.1 The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this work. The

Contractor shall afford such other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and

storage of their materials and the execution of their work. The contractor shall properly

connect and coordinate their work with the work of other contractors.

46.2 If any part of the Contractor's work depends for proper execution or results upon the

work of any other contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Owner

through the Architect any defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper

execution and results. His failure to inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the

other contractor's work as fit and proper for the reception of his work, except as to defects

which may develop in the other contractor's work after the execution of his work.

46.3 To ensure the proper execution of his subsequent work, the Contractor shall measure

work already in place and shall at once report to the Owner through the Architect any

discrepancy between the executed work and the drawings.

GC 47. CONTRACTORS' MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY

47.1 The entire project may be covered by more than one contract and in such case there

will of necessity be a certain overlapping of contracts. Each contractor shall, therefore, take

due notice of the work called for in contracts other than their own. Should the Contractor

cause damage to any separate contractor on the work, the Contractor agrees, upon due notice,

to settle with such other separate contractor by agreement, if they will so settle. If such other

separate contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been so

sustained, the Owner may notify the Contractor, who shall, at the Owner's option, defend

such proceedings at the Contractor's expense or reimburse the Owner for the expenses

incurred in defense, and, if any judgment against the Owner arises therefrom, the Contractor

shall pay or satisfy it and pay all costs and expenses thereby incurred by the Owner.

GC 48. LIENS

48.1 It is hereby mutually understood by and between the parties hereto that no Contractor,

subcontractor, materialman, vendor, laborer, mechanic, or other person, can or will contract

for or in any other manner have or acquire any lien upon the building or works covered by

this Contract, or the land upon which the same is situated.



GC 49. WORK IN EXISTING BUILDING

49.1 In addition to all other requirements of the Contract Documents, if the work involves

an addition to an existing building, the Contractor shall erect and maintain during the

progress of the work, suitable dustproof partitions to protect such building and the occupants

thereof. If necessary, in the Owner's or Contractor's judgment or pursuant to manufacturer's

directives or recommendations in order to protect occupants from noxious fumes, odors, or

hazardous substances, the Contractor may be required to provide additional ventilation

and/or work different or extended hours to avoid disruption to other activities within the

existing building.

49.2 If any portions of an existing building are to be remodeled or repaired, such portions

shall be adequately partitioned off with dustproof partitions and well ventilated. All

remodeling work shall be scheduled and submitted to the Owner and Architect for approval.

The various contractors shall schedule their work jointly, in order that each may accomplish

their work within such existing building in an orderly fashion during regular school vacation

periods, where possible, or in such a manner as to permit full use of the building and without

impairment of any existing facilities.

GC 50. INDEMNIFICATION

50.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the

Owner and the Architect and their agents and employees harmless from and against all

claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including attorneys' fees arising out of or resulting

from the performance of the work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss, or expense

(a) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of

tangible property, including the work itself and including the loss of use resulting therefrom,

and (b) only to the extent that it is caused in whole or in part by any negligent or intentional

act or omission or breach of contract of the Contractor, any subcontractor, anyone directly or

indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.

This specific indemnification by the Contractor is in addition to and not in lieu of other

remedies which may be available to the Owner.

50.2 The obligations of the Contractor under this Article shall not extend to and will be

reduced by the liability of the Architect or the Architect's Consultants to the extent directly

attributable to and proximately caused by (A) the negligent preparation or approval of

drawings or specifications, or (B) errors or omissions in written directions or instructions

given by the Architect or the Architect's Consultants.

GC 51. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY IN COMPLETION

51.1 It is understood and agreed that completion of the entire project within the time stated

in the Contract Agreement is a matter of vital necessity to the Owner, that the Owner will

suffer substantial damages if the entire project is not completed within that time, and that it

would not be possible to accurately determine the amount of such damages. In view of these

facts, the Contractor agrees to pay the Owner liquidated damages in the sum $1,000 per

calendar day or the amount as modified in any supplemental general conditions, if any, which

elapses between the date stated in the Construction Agreement, as extended by any



extensions of time under the provisions of the General Conditions of the Contract, and the

date when the entire project is finally accepted within the meaning of the acceptance and

Final Payment provision of the General Conditions of the Contract. If the Contractor shall

fail to pay such liquidated damages promptly upon demand therefor, the surety on his

performance bond shall pay such damages. Also, the Owner may withhold all or any part of

such liquidated damages from any payments due the Contractor. No changes in the work

shall extend the time for completion unless set forth on a properly approved change order.

GC 52. ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT

52.1 Within a reasonable time after final completion of the work and before final

acceptance thereof, a final inspection shall be made by the Architect accompanied by the

Owner to determine whether the work has been completed in accordance with the Contract

Documents. A written Report of Inspection and detailed "punch list," certified as to contents

and date of inspection, shall be completed by the Owner and the Architect and delivered or

mailed to the Contractor.

52.2 All prior Requests for Payment shall be subject to correction in the final Request for

Payment. When all work, including the punch list, has been certified by the Architect as

finally and satisfactorily completed, and approved by the authorized representative of the

Owner, it shall be deemed accepted as of the date of the issuance of the Owner's Letter of

Acceptance.

52.3 Upon submission of the final Request for Payment, the time of final settlement for the

work shall be established and shall, thereafter, be advertised by two (2) publications of

notice, the last of which shall appear at least ten (10) days prior to the time of final

settlement. Final payment and settlement shall be made at the time of final settlement as

advertised, or as soon thereafter as appropriate and practicable, in the judgment of the

Owner, after resolution of claims and set-offs.

52.4 Neither the final payment nor any part of any sums withheld shall become due until

the Contractor delivers to the Owner verified documentation showing full payment for all

labor, materials, supplies, and equipment expended upon or incorporated in the work under

the Contractor's Contract with the Owner. If any unpaid claim for such labor, materials,

supplies, or equipment is filed with the Owner before payment in full of all sums due the

Contractor, the Owner shall withhold from the final payment sufficient funds, if available, to

provide for the payment of such claim, until the same shall have been paid or withdrawn.

Such payment or withdrawal shall be evidenced by filing with the Owner a receipt in full or

an order authorizing withdrawal signed by the claimant or their duly authorized agent or

assignee. Such funds shall ordinarily not be withheld longer than ninety (90) days following

the date fixed for final settlement with the Contractor, as set forth in the published Notice of

Contractor's Settlement, unless an action has been commenced within that time to enforce

such unpaid claim and a Notice of Lis Pendens has been filed with the Owner.

52.5 If any claim for such labor, materials, supplies, or equipment remains unsatisfied after

all payments are made by the Owner to the Contractor, the Contractor shall refund to the

Owner all sums which the latter may for any reason be compelled to pay to satisfy such

claim, including all costs and attorneys' fees incurred by the Owner as a result of the

Contractor's default in such respect.



52.6 The making and acceptance of the final payment shall not constitute a waiver of any

claims by the Owner, including, among other things, those arising from unpaid claims, from

faulty work which appears before or after final payment, or from any failure to comply with

any requirements of the Contract Documents.


furnish a listing, giving names, addresses, and telephone numbers of all subcontractors and

material suppliers who furnished labor or materials on the project with identification of the

services rendered or materials provided.


furnish to the District a list itemizing all kitchen equipment with associated cost that was

installed in the Project.

GC 53. WARRANTIES ON PORTIONS OF THE WORK

53.1 The Contractor shall, in case of work performed or materials or equipment provided

for which warranties are required by the Contract Documents, secure the required warranties

and deliver copies thereof to the Architect and the Owner upon completion of the work. All

such warranties shall commence from the date set forth in the Letter of Acceptance and will

not in any way reduce the Contractor's responsibilities under his Contract. Whenever

guarantees or warranties are required by the specifications for a longer period than one year,

such longer period shall govern.

GC 54. CONTRACTOR'S PROJECT GUARANTEE AFTER

COMPLETION

54.1 The Contractor expressly warrants and guarantees that the project will be constructed

in a first-class, workmanlike manner; that it will be safe, free from structural and

workmanship defects and defects in materials; and that the improvements will be suitable

and fit for occupancy and for the purpose for which they were intended.

54.2 Neither the Architect's approval of the final Request for Payment nor payment of any

Request for Payment or of any sum previously withheld from the Contractor shall relieve the

Contractor of responsibility for the warranty and guarantee hereunder or for faulty materials

or workmanship, and, unless otherwise agreed, they unconditionally agrees to remedy any

defects due thereto, and pay for any damages resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a

period of one (1) years from the date set forth in the Letter of Acceptance of his work.

54.3 The Owner, the Architect, and the Contractor together shall make one (1) complete

inspection of the work after the work has been accepted by the Architect and the Owner. The

inspection shall be made approximately eleven (11) months after the final acceptance of the

work. The Architect shall make a written report of the inspection, certified as to contents and

date of inspection, and forward the report by mail to the Owner and the Contractor within

seven (7) days after completion of the inspection. The Contractor shall immediately initiate

such remedial work as may be necessary to correct any deficiencies or defective work shown

by this report, and shall complete all such remedial work within 30 calendar days in a manner

acceptable to the Owner.

54.4 If the Contractor fails to promptly correct all deficiencies and defects shown by the

report, the Owner may do so, after giving the Contractor ten (10) days' written notice of



intention to do so. The Owner shall be entitled to collect from the Contractor all costs and

expenses incurred in correcting such deficiencies and defects, as well as all damages

resulting from such deficiencies and defects. The guarantee and warranties of the Contractor

provided for herein are in addition to and not in lieu of any other remedies available to the

Owner.

GC 55. LIMITATION OF ACTIONS AND VENUE

55.1 Any actions against the Contractor, his subcontractors, suppliers, or others providing

materials or services for the project, brought to recover damages for injury to person, damage

to property, including loss or damage to the property or the project itself, or defects in

materials caused by the design, manufacture, supplying, planning, supervision, inspection,

construction, or observation of construction of the project shall be brought within six (6)

years after such claim for relief arises and the nature and extent are fully discovered.

55.2 In no case shall such an action be brought more than ten (10) years after the final

completion and acceptance of the project; provided, however, that in any case where the

cause of action arises during the tenth year, such action shall be brought within six (6) years

after such cause of action arises and the nature and extent are fully discovered by the Owner.

55.3 All claims and disputes arising out of and relating to this Agreement shall be resolved

by litigation. Venue shall lie exclusively in the Jefferson County District Court, State of

Colorado.

GC 56. SOIL TEST REPORT

56.1 The Owner may arrange for a separate consultant to conduct field and laboratory soil

investigations on the site and to prepare a report of the findings. Such reports, if

accomplished, will be available for review by the Contractor in the Architect's office. Such

data is offered solely for reference and is not to be considered a part of the Contract

Documents. The data contained in any such document prepared for the Owner by a separate

consultant is believed to be reliable; however, the Owner and Architect do not guarantee its

accuracy or completeness. All applicable subcontractors shall be fully familiar with the

contents of such reports, if prepared, and shall consider and evaluate them in the performance

of their contracts.

GC 57. EXPEDITING MATERIALS

57.1 Each Contractor shall, immediately after receipt of Notice of Contract Award and

approval of his list of subcontractors and material suppliers, place orders for all equipment,

materials, and supplies required for the work. He shall, when requested, submit to the

Architect evidence that such orders have been placed. The Contractor shall exercise due

diligence in seeing that all equipment, materials, and supplies are delivered well in advance

of the time they are needed on the job; and they shall properly store and protect same at their

expense and in accordance with these General Conditions, either at the site or elsewhere as

approved by the Architect.



GC 58. MISCELLANEOUS KEYS, SWITCHES, ETC.

58.1 Except as otherwise specifically required by the Project Technical Specifications at

the completion of the project, all loose keys for hose bibs, adjustment keys and wrenches for

door closers and panic hardware, keys for electric switches, electrical panels, and all other

equipment shall be identified and accounted for and turned over to the Architect for

transmittal to the Owner.

GC 59. PREFERENCE FOR COLORADO LABOR, MATERIALS, AND

RESIDENT BIDDERS

59.1 In compliance with Colorado Revised Statutes Sections 8-17-101 and -102 (1973),

preference shall be given to Colorado labor in the several classifications of skilled and

common labor, and not less than eighty percent (80%) of each type or class of labor in the

several classifications of skilled and common labor employed shall be Colorado labor. The

term "Colorado labor" means any person who is a resident of the State of Colorado at the

time of employment, without discrimination as to race, creed, color, sex, age, religion,

national origin, or disability, except when age or sex is a bona fide occupational

qualification.

59.2 In compliance with Colorado Revised Statutes Section 8-18-101 (1973), if any of the

work includes a contract for commodities and services, preference shall be given to a resident

bidder (as defined in GC 59 below) against a nonresident bidder equal to the preference

given or required by the state in which the nonresident bidder is a resident.

59.3 In compliance with Colorado Revised Statutes, Sections 8-19-101 and -102 (1985),

preference shall be given to resident bidders against nonresident bidders from a state or

foreign country equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in

which the nonresident bidder is a resident. The term "resident bidder" means a person,

partnership, corporation, or joint venture which is (a) authorized to transact business in

Colorado and which maintains its principal place of business in Colorado; or (b) authorized

to transact business in Colorado, which maintains a place of business in Colorado, and which

has paid Colorado unemployment compensation taxes in at least seventy-five percent (75%)

of the eight (8) quarters immediately prior to bidding on the work.

GC 60. LABOR DISPUTES

60.1 Notwithstanding any other provision contained elsewhere herein and superseding any

contrary term expressed herein, the Contractor agrees that in the event of any picket or other

form of labor dispute at the construction site, whether such dispute or picket is in connection

with the Contractor, subcontractor, or any other person or entity on the construction site, the

Contractor will continue to perform the work required herein without interruption or delay.

In the event the Contractor fails to continue the performance of the work included herein,

without interruption or delay, because of such picket or other form of labor dispute, the

Owner may terminate the services of the Contractor after giving seventy-two (72) hours'

written notice of intent to do so. The terminated Contractor may then be replaced at the

discretion of the Owner and all extra costs involved in doing so shall be payable by the

terminated Contractor.



60.2 During the performance of the work required by the Contract Documents, the

Contractor and his subcontractors and their employees, agents, or suppliers, will use such

entrance or entrances to the construction site as may be designated from time to time by the

Owner. Further, the Contractor and his subcontractors, their employees and agents, shall

perform the work at such times of the day and days of the week as may be designated by the

Owner from time to time.

GC 61. LABOR, WORKMANSHIP, AND SCHOOL SECURITY

61.1 All work performed under this contract shall be performed in a professional and

skillful like manner. The District may require that the Contractor immediately remove from

the construction site any employee the District or on-site school personnel deem to be

incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable.

61.2 The Contractor shall not utilize, in the performance of this contract, any laborer or

employee who has been convicted of a violent crime or a crime of such nature (i.e. child

related offenses) as to categorize the person as being unsuitable for working around school

children, or has engaged in such conduct, in the last five years, as to be similarly categorized.

Suitability shall be determined by performance of security/background checks (as are

necessary in light of the potential of contact with school students, staff, property, or sensitive

records maintained at school sites) by the Contractor on all laborers and employees utilized

in the performance of the work.

61.2.1 When there is reasonable doubt regarding a particular person’s suitability, a request

may be made through the District for an approval/opinion prior to the individual

beginning work. The Contractor shall submit copies of all security/background checks

performed within twenty-four (24) hours of a request by the District for such information.

The District may request copies of these security/background checks up to twelve (12)

months after completion of the specific project (site work). Failure to complete or

submit any required security/background check requested by the District, may result in

immediate cancellation of work in process and/or removal from the active vendor and

bidders list for up to one year.

61.3 The Contractor, its laborers and employees shall not fraternize or otherwise

communicate with the students except in cases of safety and like necessities.

61.4 The Contractor shall not allow any laborer or employee to wear objectionable

clothing or caps with other than company logo, (objectionable clothing will be determined by

the District personnel), or use profanity in any manner while on school property.

61.5 The Contractor shall ensure that its laborers and employees fully comply with all

school policies/regulations pertaining to restrictions that may affect anyone on school owned

property. Examples of these current policies/regulations are:

61.5.1 Each worker shall participate in the contractors approved identification program.

61.5.2 Maintain professional worker like attire (see GC 61).

61.5.3 Controlled substances (i.e. tobacco, alcohol, illegal drugs, dangerous substances) are

not allowed on the school/construction site. (Board Policy)

61.5.4 Possession of any weapon, including a pocketknife, which is not directly used as a

tool for the work in progress is not allowed on the school/construction site.

61.5.5 Verification of Criminal Records for all employees who work on site per GC 10.



61.6 Removal of a specific person(s) from a project as a result of any condition mentioned

above will not relieve the Contractor from timely performance of work completion and will

not be considered grounds for a request for additional funds or time extension to complete

the project.

61.7 The contractor shall take over and assume all responsibility for the entire premises,

provide and maintain all protection as required by the governing laws, rules, regulations and

ordinances. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage caused by its

workers to the property of the District and shall make good any loss, damage, or injury

without cost to the owner, subject to the Builder’s Rick Coverages.

61.7.1 Except as otherwise provided in the General Conditions, the Contractor shall be

solely responsible for the safety of its work, materials, equipment, tools, etc., on the site

and shall, if it deems it necessary or expedient, employ at its own expense the services of

a competent security service. The District disclaims all responsibilities for the safety of

the work, materials, equipment, tools, etc., or for any damage, which may be done to

same due to theft, or any other cause until such time as the owner formally accepts the

completed work.

61.7.2 The Contractor shall take special precautions against fire and shall comply fully with

the requirements of city, county, and insurance authorities including stipulation as

outlined below:

61.7.2.1 Combustible refuse shall be removed from the site and disposed of daily in a

manner approved by the governing authorities.

61.7.2.2 Private and public streets, sidewalks, roads, etc., shall be protected and

maintained during the course of work, and any damage to same shall be repaired by

the Contractor at its own expense.

61.7.2.3 Gas line and Boiler work.

61.7.2.4 The Contractor will not do any work on gas lines on or near the building

while the building is occupied.

61.7.2.5 No work on the boilers, furnaces, or gas lines will be done without prior

notification and approval of the Construction Management department.

61.7.2.6 Boilers and furnaces will not be turned on or off by any Contractor without

prior notification and approval of the Construction Management department.

61.7.2.7 When boilers or furnaces are to be turned on or off, the District Maintenance

department will be notified and the appropriate personnel will be dispatched to carry

out the necessary procedures.

61.7.2.8 The Contractor will be required to accept full responsibility of the keys as

issued for access. The contractor will be financially liable for the replacement of lost

keys as well as the re-keying of the building to which the keys belong. Contractor

agrees to report lost or stolen keys immediately to the District Security office. Keys

are NOT TO BE DUPLICATED under any circumstances, and Contractor

understands that keys must be surrendered immediately upon request.

61.8 Illegal Aliens. The Contractor shall not knowingly employ or contract with an illegal

alien to perform work under this Contract, or enter into a contract with a subcontractor that

fails to certify to the Contractor that the subcontractor shall not knowingly employ or

contract with an illegal alien to perform work under this public contract.

61.8.1 The Contractor has verified or attempted to verify through participation in the United

States Citizenship and Immigration Services’ Basic Pilot Employment Verification



Program (hereinafter referred to as the “Basic Pilot Program”) that the Contractor does

not employ any illegal aliens. If the Contractor has not been accepted into the Basic Pilot

Program prior to entering into this Contract, the Contractor shall apply to participate in

the Basic Pilot Program every three months until the Contractor is accepted or the

Contract for services has been completed, whichever is earlier. The Contractor shall not

use the Basic Pilot Program to undertake pre-employment screening of job applicants

while the Contract is being performed.

61.8.2 If the Contractor obtains actual knowledge that a subcontractor performing work

under this Contract knowingly employs or contracts with an illegal alien, the Contractor

shall:

61.8.2.1 Notify the subcontractor and the Owner within three days that the Contractor

has actual knowledge that the subcontractor is employing or contracting with an

illegal alien; and

61.8.2.2 Terminate the subcontract if within three days of receiving actual notice the

subcontractor does not stop employing or contracting with the illegal alien, except

that the Contractor shall not terminate the subcontractor if during such three days the

subcontractor provides information to establish that the subcontractor has not

knowingly employed or contracted with an illegal alien.

61.8.3 The Contractor shall comply with any reasonable request by the Department of Labor

and Employment (hereinafter referred to as the “Department”) made in the course of an

investigation that the Department is undertaking pursuant to C.R.S. § 8-17.5-102(5).

61.8.4 If the Contractor violates the provisions of this section GC 61, the Owner may

terminate the contract for breach and the Contractor shall be liable for actual and

consequential damages.

GC 62. END OF GENERAL CONDITIONS

4821-6632-7816, v. 1

01 11 00 - 1 Summary of Work

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.01 CONDITIONS AND REQUIREMENTS Division 1 - General Requirements shall govern work under all Divisions of the Specifications. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The Project shall be known as Kitchen Door Replacement and is located at the Schools sites

listed below within Jefferson County School District. The Work shall consist of the replacement of a combination of existing doors, frames and hardware, providing new screen doors and associated work required for the replacement as described within the construction documents.

B. Project Locations: Adams Elementary School Allendale Elementary School Arvada K-8 School Belmar Elementary School Bergen Meadow Elementary School Bergen Valley Elementary School Blue Heron Elementary School Bradford Primary School Campbell Elementary School Carmody Middle School Columbine Hills Elementary School Creighton Middle School Deane Elementary School Deer Creek Middle School Dutch Creek Elementary School Edgewater Elementary School Eiber Elementary School Elk Creek Elementary School Falcon Bluffs Middle School Fitzmorris Elementary School Foothills Elementary School Foster Elementary School Fremont Elementary School Glennon Heights Elementary School Governor’s Ranch Elementary School Green Mountain Elementary School Hackberry Hill Elementary School Hutchinson Elementary School Kendallvue Elementary School Kendrick Lakes Elementary School

Kullerstrand Elementary School Lasley Elementary School Lawrence Elementary School Lukas Elementary School Lumberg Elementary School Mandalay Middle School Maple Grove Elementary School Marshdale Elementary School Meiklejohn Elementary School Mitchell Elementary School Moore Middle School Mortensen Elementary School Mount Carbon Elementary School Normandy Elementary School North Arvada Middle School Oberon Middle School O’Connell Middle School Parmalee Elementary School Parr Elementary School Patterson Elementary School Peiffer Elementary School Pennington Elementary School Powderhorn Elementary School Prospect Valley Elementary School Red Rocks Elementary School Rooney Ranch Elementary School Ryan Elementary School Semper Elementary School Shelton Elementary School Sheridan Green Elementary School Sierra Elementary School South Lakewood Elementary School Stein Elementary School

Stevens Elementary School Stober Elementary School Stoney Creek Elementary School Stott Elementary School Summit Ridge Middle School Swanson Elementary School Thomson Elementary School Ute Meadows Elementary School Van Arsdale Elementary School Vivian Elementary School Warder Elementary School Warren Tech School Welchester Elementary School West Jefferson Elementary School West Jefferson Middle School Westridge Elementary School West Woods Elementary School Wilmore-Davis Elementary School Wilmot Elementary School Witt Elementary School


1.03 SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND ADDENDA A. Drawings: See Index on Drawings. B. Project Manual: Kitchen Door Replacement

C. Addenda: All Addenda issued prior to bidding. 1.04 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. Failure to visit site will in no way relieve Contractor from necessity of furnishing materials or

performing work that may be required to complete work in accordance with Drawings and Specifications without additional cost to Owner.

1.05 CONTRACTS A. All work under this contract will be executed under a single prime contract between the Owner

and the General Contractor. B. The Owner will secure separate contracts for any Asbestos-Related work in the existing building

prior to demolition. 1.06 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Limitations: Operations of the General Contractor shall be limited to areas where work is indicated.

B. Coordination with Owner: Schedule with Owner all work to be performed.

C. Construction Access: Maintain safe access and egress from the construction site. Access to the

construction site will limit exposure to neighborhood and school traffic. Traffic plan will be reviewed and approved by the District. Provide temporary walkways and protective fencing over excavations and through construction areas even though not specifically indicated on the drawings.

1.07 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY Contractor shall limit his operations and site access and those of his subcontractors to areas of

the site being disturbed by construction. Other areas shall be left undisturbed. Any damage to such areas will require repair at the Contractor's expense.

1.08 COORDINATION A. General: Coordinate work of various sections of specifications to assure efficient and orderly

sequence of installation of construction elements with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

B. Equipment: Verify characteristics of elements of interrelated operating equipment are compatible;

coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

1. Electrical Requirements: a. Comply with NEC. b. Provide UL listed and labeled products where applicable.


C. Spaces: Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically. Follow routing indicated for pipes, ducts and conduits as closely as practicable; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installation, for maintenance and for repairs.

D. Finished Areas: In finished areas concealed pipes, ducts and wiring in the construction.

Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Work by Owner: Owner shall remove all items to be salvaged or stored for future use prior to

work in an existing area. Coordinate schedule with the owner to ensure their work is completed as required.

END OF SECTION

01 14 00 - 1 Work Restrictions

SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS 1.01 ACCESS TO SITE

A. Arrange in advance with Jefferson County School District, R-1 B. Physical and schedule limitations per Contract Documents

1.02 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS: A. Allow for continued occupancy of, access to, and egress from non-construction areas in

compliance with applicable codes. B. The construction work, including disruptive noise, shall not interfere with school testing. The

Contractor shall coordinate with an Owner provided testing schedule. C. The construction work shall not interfere with before or after hour school functions.

1.03 USE OF PREMISES:

A. Per General Conditions B. Refer to contract documents for limits for work, access, staging, storage, etc. C. Non-school personnel are prohibited outside of designated contract areas at all times.

END OF SECTION

01 31 19 - 1 Project Meetings

SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS 1.01 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Preconstruction and Contract Accomplishment Conference: Meeting will be scheduled by

Architect after Notice of Award. 1. Contractor will submit executed bonds and insurance certificates and will sign Contract at

this meeting. 2. Administrative requirements such as products lists, schedule of values, payment applica-

tions, and progress charts, change order procedures and project closeout will be reviewed in detail.

3. Tax exempt status procedures will also be discussed. B. Site Mobilization Conference: A meeting will be scheduled by the Architect at the site

immediately prior to contractor move-in. Representatives of the Contractor, Owner, Architect and Architect's Consultants will be present. Job site procedures to include the following items will be discussed: 1. Procedures for maintaining record documents 2. Owner's requirements 3. Construction facilities and controls 4. Temporary utilities 5. Security and housekeeping procedures 6. Materials testing 7. Services of the Geotechnical Engineer 8. Requirements of start-up trades 9. Building layout 10. Communications with Architect's Consultants 11. Access to and use of site in relation to continued use of existing facilities.

1.02 PROGRESS MEETING A. Meetings: Contractor will schedule regular periodic meetings at Contractor's job site field office.

Major subcontractors for this Project shall be required to attend construction field meetings, as directed by the General Contractor. All subcontractors shall attend meetings when required by the GENERAL CONTRACTOR, who shall determine when the subcontractors shall attend and the number of meetings required. Representatives of the Owner and Architect will be invited to attend. Also invited as appropriate to items under discussion, will be selected subcontractors and suppliers and the Architect's Consultants. Following items will be discussed: 1. Review of work progress since previous meetings 2. Field observations, problems, conflicts 3. Problems which impede construction schedule 4. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedule 5. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule 6. Revisions to construction schedule 7. Plan progress, schedule during succeeding work period 8. Coordination of schedules 9. Maintenance of quality standards 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required 11. Review proposed changes for effect on other trades, construction schedule and

completion date 12. Coordination of separate contracts

01 31 19 - 2 Project Meetings

13. Other business as required

B. Agenda and Minutes: GENERAL CONTRACTOR shall use Owner’s agenda, and keep and distribute minutes of progress meetings and lists of those present and others as directed. The meeting agenda shall be based on the owner’s format. 1. Contractor: Advise Architect at least 24 hours in advance of meeting regarding items

added to agenda. C. Persons Representing Contractor at Meetings: Have authority to commit Contractor to solutions

agreed upon in meetings. To maximum extent possible, assign same person or persons to represent Contractor at meetings throughout progress of work.

D. Coordination Meetings: Progress meetings shall in no way be considered substitute for

Contractor/ subcontractor coordination meetings. END OF SECTION

01 33 00 - 1 Submittals

SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. List of Subcontractors:

1. Instructions to Bidders 2. General Conditions

B. Products List:

1. Section 01 60 00 Product Requirements C. Progress Schedule:

1. General and Supplementary Conditions D. Schedule of Values:

1. General and Supplementary Conditions E. Performance Bond/Labor and Material Payment Bond:

1. Instructions to Bidders 2. General and Supplementary Conditions

F. Insurance Certificates:

1. General and Supplementary Conditions G. Applications for Payment:

1. General and Supplementary Conditions H. Project Record Documents:

1. Section 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements I. Warranties:

1. Section 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements J. Final Paperwork:

1. Section 01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements K. Contractor's Quality Control System:

1. Section 01 45 00 Quality Control 1.02 GENERAL A. Submittals: Made early enough to account for processing described below and a reasonable

period for review by Architect and Engineers. 1.03 PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Schedule: In the form of “Suretrac”, MS “Project” or similar chart that identifies the start and

completion of each school location and also each project element on the Schedule of Values.


1. Schedule: Indicate major dependencies among elements on schedule. 2. Completion Time: As specified in Agreement. Revise schedule when completion time is

revised by Change Order. B. Schedule Submittal: Within ten days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, submit one reproducible

copy and four prints of preliminary construction schedule. 1. Within 10 days after receipt of review comments on preliminary schedule, submit one

reproducible and four prints of construction schedule. 2. With each monthly application for payment, submit four prints of updated construction

schedule indicating actual work progress in comparison to scheduled progress. C. Estimated Payments: Prepare and submit estimate of partial payments as reflected by estimate

work progress with submittal of construction schedule. D. Monthly Reports:

1. With each monthly application for payment, submit itemized report of delivery status of major and critical items of purchased equipment and materials, including Shop Drawings and status of shop and field fabricated work.

2. If completion of any part of work or delivery of materials is behind construction schedule, submit plan for bringing work up to schedule.

3. Owner shall have right to withhold progress payments for work if Contractor fails to update and submit progress schedule and reports as specified.

E. Contractor's Responsibility: Nothing in these requirements shall be deemed to usurpation of

Contractor's authority and responsibility to plan and schedule work as he sees fit, subject to all other requirements Contract Documents.

1.04 SUBMITTALS LIST, SCHEDULE AND PROCEDURES A. Submittal: Within 30 days after award of Contract, and before any items are submitted for review,

submit to Architect two copies of submittal list and schedule. B. Schedule: Compile complete schedule of all submittals anticipated to be made during progress of

work. 1. Include list of each type of item for which Contractor's drawings, Shop Drawings, Product

Data, Certificates of Compliance, Samples, Warranties or other types of submittals as required.

2. On acceptance by Architect, Contractor shall adhere to schedule except when specifically otherwise permitted.

C. Code Designation: On schedule, designate each items with number code utilizing Specification

Section five digit numbers plus digital extension numbers as required to identify specific items submitted. 1. Each Submittal: Marked with same code designation.

D. Coordination: Coordinate schedule with Subcontractors and materials suppliers. E. Revisions: Revise and update schedule on monthly basis as necessary to reflect conditions and

sequences. Promptly submit any revised schedules to Architect for review.


F. Transmittals: Include transmittal letter with each submittal, identify item by above Specification Section Code Designation. Use separate transmittal for each submittal from different Specification Sections. 1. Each submittal: have Specification Section submittal number. 2. Re-submittals: Have original submittals number and extension numbers in numerical

order for each re-submittal. 3. Mechanical and Electrical Submittals: Broken down into parts with separate extension

numbers so that individual parts can be resubmitted without confusion. G. Deviations: Clearly mark and note any deviations from Contract Documents in submittals. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop Drawings: Make particular note of field-measured dimensions, as-built conditions, and

conditions requiring special coordination with other contractors and requirements of activities of Owner.

B. Subcontractor: Submit at least four copies per shop drawing sheet and specified number of

samples to the Contractor. C. Contractor:

1. Review all shop drawings for accuracy, completeness, and conformity with the Contract Documents. Make notes and corrections on sepia tracings and prints.

2. Stamp with contractor's stamp/ date. Signature of individual who reviewed the shop drawings is required below the Contractor's stamp.

3. Print as required for Contractor's record. 4. Send four sets of copies to Architect. 5. Shop drawings not stamped and signed by Contractor will be returned.

D. Architect:

1. Check drawings by making notes and corrections on the copies, stamp "No Exceptions Taken", "Revise and Resubmit", "Rejected", etc., as required.

2. In the event that Shop Drawings require a consultant's check, route the copies through the consultant and back to the Architect as necessary. Consultant will retain one set of copies.

3. Retain one set of copies for record and transmit one set to Owner if required. 4. Return marked copies to Contractor. Additional copies submitted for review may not, at

the discretion of the Architect, be reviewed or returned to the Contractor. E. Contractor:

1. Send copies to subcontractor. F. Subcontractor:

1. Print necessary copies for record, distribution, etc. G. Re-submittal: In the event the drawings have to be resubmitted to Architect, copies shall be

returned directly to Contractor. Subcontractor shall make his corrections and re-route new copies as outlined above.

H. References: Reference Shop Drawings to applicable Drawings and Specification sections to

facilitate ease and accuracy of checking.


1.06 PRODUCT DATA A. Subcontractor: Submit four (4) copies of brochure material and any required Samples. B. Routing: Routing will be as indicated above for Shop Drawings with the Architect and Engineer

retaining two sets of copies for file and returning two sets of copies to the Contractor for his file and distribution to the subcontractor as applicable.

C. Reference: Reference Product Data to applicable Drawings and Specification sections to facilitate

ease and accuracy of checking. D. When contents of submitted literature from manufacturers includes data not pertinent to submittal,

clearly indicate which portion of contents is being submitted for review. 1.07 JOB SITE DOCUMENTS A. Documents: Keep complete set of accepted Shop Drawings or Product Data at job site. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Field Measurements: Responsibility of Contractor. 1.09 SAMPLES A. Checklist: Upon Contractor’s request the Architect will provide Contractor with checklist indicating

materials where color, texture or finish is subject to selection by Architect. Certain other samples may also be requested for use by Architect in preparation of color and material sample presentations for Owner.

B. Submittal: Promptly after receipt of checklist, assemble and delivery to Architect complete

collection of required samples. Unless otherwise specified, submit Samples in quantity which is required to be returned plus one which will be retained by Architect.

C. Samples: Bear tag or label providing following information:

1. Project name and location 2. Manufacturer, supplier 3. Name, finish, and composition of material 4. Location of where material is to be use 5. Specification Section number.

Labels: Large enough for acceptance stamp. D. Selection: Upon receipt of complete collection of Samples, Architect will, with reasonable

promptness, make selections and prepare and deliver to Contractor schedule covering items subject to selection. Architect reserves right not to make individual determination or selections, particularly interior or exterior finish selections, until all Samples of all related and/or adjacent materials are submitted.


1.10 CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE A. Certificates:

1. Where Certificates of Compliance are specified, show on each certification name and location of work, name and address of Contractor, quantity and ate or dates of shipment or delivery to which certificate applies, and name of manufacturer.

2. Certification: In form of letter or company standard forms. 3. Certificates: Signed by officer of manufacturer. 4. Laboratory Test Reports: Show date of testing, specified requirements for which testing

was performed, and results of tests. END OF SECTION

01 35 16 - 1 Alteration Project Procedures

SECTION 01 35 16 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Coordinate work of trades and schedule elements of alterations and renovation work by

procedures and methods to expedite completion of the work. B. In addition to demolition specified in Section 02 41 19 and that specifically shown, cut, move and

remove items as necessary to provide access or to allow alterations and new work to proceed. Include such items as: 1. Repair or removal of hazardous or unsanitary conditions. 2. Removal of abandoned items and items serving no useful purpose, such as abandoned

piping, conduit and wiring. 3. Removal of unsuitable or extraneous materials not marked for salvage, such as

abandoned furnishings and equipment, and debris such as rotted wood, rusted metals and deteriorated concrete.

4. Cleaning of surfaces, and removal of surface finishes, as needed to install new work and finishes.

C. Patch, repair and refinish existing items to remain, to the specified conditions for each material,

with a workmanlike transition to adjacent new items of construction. D. Coordinate power outages and major interruptions of progress of construction work with Owner. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Materials for Renovation Work: Specifications in Divisions 2 through 33. B. Cutting and Patching of New or Existing Work During Construction: Section 01 73 29 Cutting and

Patching. C. Use of Existing Utilities: Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls. D. Cleaning During Construction: Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls. E. Selective Demolition: Section 02 41 13. 1.03 ALTERATIONS, CUTTING AND PROTECTION A. Assign the work of moving, removal, cutting and patching to trades qualified to perform the work

in a manner to cause least damage to each type of work, and provide means of returning surfaces to appearance of new work.

B. Perform cutting and removal work to remove minimum necessary, and in a manner to avoid

damage to adjacent work. 1. Cut finish surfaces such as masonry, tile, stone flooring, plaster or metals by methods to

terminate surfaces in a straight line at a natural point of division.


C. Protect existing finishes, equipment and, adjacent work which is scheduled to remain, from damage. 1. Protect existing and new work from weather and extremes of temperature.

a. Maintain existing interior work above 60oF. b. Provide weather protection, waterproofing, heat and humidity control as needed

to prevent damage to remaining existing work and to new work. D. Temporary Enclosures:

1. Provide temporary, dustproof enclosures to separate work areas from existing building and from areas occupied by Owner.

2. Provide weatherproof partitions at portions of existing building which are exposed during construction of addition.

1.04 COORDINATION WITH OWNER'S USE OF THE FACILITY A. General: Coordinate construction phasing with operation of Owner's existing facility. The Owner

intends to occupy portions of the existing building throughout construction. 1. Establish effective communications with the Owner regarding his operation and moving

schedule. Give as much advance notice as possible, in addition to the minimums specified, for construction activities which will affect Owner's operations.

2. Coordinate with Owner scheduling for asbestos removal to provide Owner's consultant with minimum 3 weeks advanced notice.

B. Utility Interruptions: Coordinate and Schedule with Owner interruptions of building utilities for

hours when building is closed to normal operations, i.e. weekends, evenings, etc. Notify Owner 72 hours in advance of all utility interruptions, including those scheduled for off hours. Obtain Owner’s permission before any scheduled utility service interruption at any time.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS FOR PATCHING, EXTENDING AND MATCHING A. General Requirements that Work be Complete:

1. Provide same products or types of construction as that in existing structure, as needed to patch, extend or match existing work. a. General Contract Documents will not define products or standards of

workmanship present in existing construction; Contractor shall determine products by inspection and any necessary testing, and workmanship by use of the existing as a sample of comparison.

2. Presence of a product, finish, or type of construction, requires that patching, extending or matching shall be performed as necessary to make Work complete and consistent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LAYING OUT WORK A. Verify dimensions and elevations indicated in layout of existing work. Refer discrepancies

between Drawings, Specifications and existing conditions to Architect for adjustment before work affected is performed. Failure to make such notification shall place responsibility upon Contractor to carry out work in satisfactory, workmanlike manner. In addition verify existence of any materials containing asbestos per AHERA plan and notify Architect and Owner immediately.


B. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the location and elevation of the construction contemplated by the Construction Documents.

C. Prior to commencing work, carefully compare and check Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and

Electrical Drawings, each with the other that in any way affects the location or elevation of the work to be executed, and should any discrepancy be found, immediately report the same to the Architect for verification and adjustment.

3.02 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING A. Drawings showing location of equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. are diagrammatic and job

conditions shall not always duplicate conditions shown. When this situation occurs, it shall be brought to the Architect's attention immediately and the relocation determined in a joint conference. Work shall not proceed until the Contractor receives approval from Architect in writing.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the relocating of any items without first obtaining the

Architect's approval. He shall remove and relocate such items at his own expense if so directed by the Architect.

3.03 PATCHING EXISTING FACILITIES A. Existing structures, facilities, etc. that are damaged or removed due to required construction work,

shall be patched, repaired or replaced, and be left in their original state of repair by the Contractor, to satisfaction of the Architect.

3.04 INTEGRATING EXISTING WORK A. Protect existing improvements from damage. B. Contractor's operations shall be confined to the immediate vicinity of the new work and shall not in

any way interfere with or obstruct the ingress or egress to and from adjacent facilities. C. Where new work is to be connected to existing work, special care shall be exercised not to disturb

or damage the existing work more than necessary. All damaged work shall be replaced, repaired and restored to its original condition at no cost to the Owner.

3.05 ADJUSTMENTS A. Where partitions are removed, patch floors, walls and ceilings with finish materials to match

existing. 1. Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors and

ceilings to provide smooth planes without breaks, steps or bulkheads, unless shown on Drawings to have breaks, steps or bulkheads.

2. Where extreme change of plane of two inches or more occurs, request instructions from Architect as to method of making transition.

B. Trim and refinish existing doors as necessary to clear new floors. Maintain labeled assembly

where required.


3.06 DAMAGED SURFACES A. Patch and replace any portion of an existing finished surface which is found to be damaged, lifted,

discolored, or shows other imperfections, with matching material. 1. Provide adequate support of substrate prior to patching the finish. 2. Refinish patched portions of painted or coated surfaces in a manner to produce uniform

color and texture over entire surface. 3. When existing surface finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest

intersections. 3.07 TRANSITION FROM EXISTING TO NEW WORK A. When new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make a smooth and workmanlike

transition. Patch work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so that the patch or transition is invisible at a distance of five feet. 1. When finished surfaces are cut in such a way that a smooth transition with new work is

not possible, terminate existing surface in a neat manner along a straight line at a natural line of division, and provide trim appropriate to finished surface. Provide bulkheads or soffits when required by Drawings.

3.08 DUST CONTROL A. Precaution shall be exercised at all times to control dust created as a result of any operations

during the construction period. If serious problems arise due to air borne dust, or when directed by the Architect or Owner, operations causing such problems shall be temporarily discontinued and necessary steps taken to control the dust.

3.09 FIRE PROTECTION A. Maintain good housekeeping practices to reduce the risk of fire damage and injury to workmen.

All scrap materials, rubbish and trash shall be removed daily from in and about the work area and shall not be permitted to be scattered to adjacent areas. Contractor shall provide a trash dumpster to be used by all trades for trash.

B. Suitable storage space shall be provided outside the immediate building area for storing

flammable materials and paints; no storage will be permitted in the building. Excess flammable liquids being used inside the building shall be kept in closed metal container and removed from the building during unused periods.

C. A fire extinguisher shall be available at each location where cutting or welding is being performed.

Where electric or gas welding or cutting work is done, interposed shields of incombustible material shall be used to protect against fire damaged due to sparks and hot metal. When temporary heating devises are used, a watchman shall be present to cover periods when other workmen are not on the premises.

D. Provide fire extinguishers in accordance with the recommendations of NFPA Bulletins Nos. 10 and

241. However, in all cases a minimum of four fire extinguishers shall be available for each building. 3.10 CLEANING A. Perform periodic and final cleaning as specified in Section 01 74 00, 01 50 00 and as follows:

1. Clean Owner-occupied areas where construction or remodeling is occurring, daily. 2. Clean areas of heavy dust production daily,.


3. Clean spillage and overspray immediately. B. At completion of work of each trade, clean area and make surfaces ready for work of successive trades. C. At completion of work in each area, provide final cleaning and return space to a condition suitable

for use by Owner. END OF SECTION

01 35 53-1 Security Procedures

SECTION 01 35 53 SECURITY PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to General Conditions. B. Successful bidders will be required to complete Criminal Record Check on all employees

who work on the site of the project. Employees who have been convicted of a violent or serious felony, including crimes that require registration on the National Sexual Offender Registry will not be allowed to work on the site of the project. The contractor must complete the Criminal Records Check Certification. Each Contractor will be responsible to adhere to any Federal, State or Local privacy and confidentiality requirements.

C. Criminal Records Check Certification: Complete the attached form.

01 35 53-2 Security Procedures

Criminal Records Check Certification

I, , certify that: Name of Contractor

1. I have carefully read and understand the General Conditions of the Contract, Article 10.4, regarding the Criminal Records Check required by Jefferson County School District, R-1.

2. Due to the nature of the work I will be performing for the District, my

employees May have contact with the students in the District.

3. None of the employees who will be performing the work have been convicted of a violent or serious felony as defined in the General Conditions of the Contract, Articles 10.4 and 61.2. This determination was made by a background check through the Department of Justice or the Colorado Bureau of Investigation.

(https://www.cbirecordscheck.com/Index.asp) I declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed at , Colorado, on Date Signature Typed or Printed Name Title Address

END OF SECTION 01 35 53

https://www.cbirecordscheck.com/Index.asp

01 41 00 - 1 Regulatory Requirements

SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.01 PERMITS AND FEES A. See General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 CODES AND ORDINANCES A. Compliance: All Contractors shall comply with all applicable codes, ordinances and regulations in

effect at the time of bid opening including but not necessarily limited to the following: Federal Regulatory Requirements: Environmental Protection Agency Occupational Safety and Health Administration Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) State of Colorado Regulatory Requirements: International Building Code, 2006 Edition International Fire Codes International Mechanical Code, 2006 Edition International Plumbing Code, 2006 Edition National Electrical Code, 2012 Edition Model Energy Code (ICC) International Solar Energy Code (ISCC) ANSI/ASME A17.1 Safety Code of Elevators National Fire Protection Association Standards Colorado Department of Health: Enforced through Jefferson County Health Department Colorado Department of Highways “Uniform Traffic Control Device Manual” State of Colorado Water Quality Regulations American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Boiler Code State of Colorado Geological Survey B. Discrepancies: If discrepancies occur between Contract Documents, local codes, local utility

requirements, etc., the most stringent requirements shall apply. END OF SECTION

01 42 13 - 1 Abbreviations and Symbols

SECTION 01 42 13 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Drawing Symbols:

1. Drawings B. Drawing or Schedule Abbreviations:

1. Drawings or Schedules 1.02 SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE EXPLANATION A. These Specifications are of abbreviated, simplified or streamlined type and include incomplete

sentences. 1. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the contractor shall", "in conformity therewith",

"shall be", "as noted on the drawings", "a", "the", are intentional. 2. Supply omitted words or phrases by inference in same manner as they are when "NOTE"

occurs on drawings. 3. Supply words "shall be" or "shall" by inference when colon is used within sentences or

phrases. 4. Supply words "on the drawings" by inference when "as indicated" is used with sentences

or phrases. 5. "Provide" shall mean furnish and install.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS A. Reference in Contract Documents to trade associations, technical societies, recognized

authorities and other institutions include following organizations which are sometimes referred to only by corresponding abbreviations.

AA Aluminum Association AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association ACI American Concrete Institute ADA Americans With Disabilities Act AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timer Construction ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Preservers Association AWS American Welding Society BIA Brick Institute of America CDA Copper Development Association, Inc. CRA California Redwood Association CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) DFPA Douglas Fir Plywood Association

01 42 13 - 2 Abbreviations and Symbols

FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association FM Factory Mutual Engineering Division FS Federal Specification GA Gypsum Association MIA Marble Institute of America MIL Military Specification MLMA Metal Lath Manufacturer's Association NAAMM The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBS National Bureau of Standards NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NEC National Electrical Code (of NFPA) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NOMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturer's Association NPVLMA National Paint, Varnish and Lacquer Manufacturer's Association NTMA The National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturer's Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute PEI Porcelain Enamel Institute PS Product Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce) SDI Steel Deck Institute SJI Steel Joist Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association SPA Southern Pine Association SPI The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc. SPR Simplified Practice Recommendation (U.S. Department of Commerce) SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council SWI Steel Window Institute TCA Tile Council of America TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. WCLA West Cost Lumbermen's Association WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute WWPA Western Wood Products Association

END OF SECTION

01 42 19 - 1 Reference Standards

SECTION 01 42 19 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: For products or workmanship specified by association, trade or Federal

Standards, comply with requirements of standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. 1. No provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code (whether or not

specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents) shall be effective to change duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor or Architect or any of their consultants, agents or employees from those set forth in Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to Architect or any of Architect's consultants, agents or employees any duty or authority to supervise or direct furnishing or performance of Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibilities contrary to provisions of General and Supplementary Conditions.

B. Effective Date: Date of standard is that in effect as of documents date except when specific date

is specified or when standard is part of applicable code which includes edition date. C. Copies: When required by individual sections, obtain copy of standard. Maintain copy at job site

during work. END OF SECTION

01 45 00 - 1 Quality Control

SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Cost of Inspections and Testing: General Conditions 1.02 TESTING - GENERAL A. Contractor: Provide equipment and facilities as required, subject to Architect's review, for

conducting field tests and for collecting and forwarding samples. 1. Do not use materials or equipment represented by samples until tests, if required, have

been made and the materials or equipment found to be acceptable. 2. Do not incorporate any product into work which becomes unfit for use after acceptance

thereof. B. Testing: Materials or equipment proposed to be used may be tested at any time during their

preparation or use. Furnish required samples without charge and give sufficient notice of the placing of orders to permit testing. Products may be sampled either prior to shipment or after received at site of work.

C. Tests: Made by accredited testing laboratory selected by Owner. Except as otherwise provided,

sampling and testing of materials and laboratory methods and testing equipment shall be in accordance with the latest standards and tentative methods of ASTM. 1. Specific information concerning testing methods, sample sizes, etc., is included under the

applicable sections of Specifications. 2. Any modification of, or elaboration on, these test procedures included for specific

materials under their respective sections in the Specifications shall take precedence over these procedures.

1.03 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS AND TESTS PAID FOR BY OWNER (To Be Determined) 1.04 OTHER INSPECTIONS AND TESTING A. The School District shall be notified at the appropriate times to make the required inspections as

noted in Section 109.3 of the International Building Code, 2006 edition. B. Following Testing: Performed at expense of Contractor:

1. Other Tests: Any other tests required by Contract Documents not listed in article above. 2. Any additional tests required because of any tests that fail subject to following conditions:

a. Quantity and Nature of Tests: Determined by Architect. b. Tests: Taken in presence of Architect. c. Proof of Noncompliance: Contractor liable for corrective action which Architect

feels is required including complete removal and replacement of defective material.

3. Material Substitution: Any tests of material or equipment offered as substitute for specified item on which test may be required in order to prove its compliance with Specifications.

01 45 00 - 2 Quality Control

C. Contractor: May have tests performed on material and equipment for his own information and job control so long as Owner does not assume responsibility for costs or for giving them consideration when appraising quality of materials.

1.05 TEST REPORTS Reports of all tests made by testing laboratories shall be distributed by the testing laboratory as

follows: 1 Copy - Contractor 1 Copy - Applicable Supplier or Subcontractor 1 Copy - Owner 1 Copy - Applicable Engineer 1 Copy - Architect Other Copies - As Directed 1.06 GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Quality Control: Establish system to perform sufficient inspection and tests of all items of work,

including that of subcontractors, to ensure conformance to the Contract Documents for materials, workmanship, construction, finish, functional performance and identification. 1. Control System: Establish for all construction except where Contract Documents provide

for specific compliance tests by testing laboratories or engineers employed by the Owner.

B. Quality Control System: Means by which Contractor assures himself that construction complies

with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Controls: Adequate to cover all construction operations and keyed to proposed

construction schedule. C. Records: Maintain correct records on appropriate form for all inspections and tests performed,

instructions received from Architect and actions taken as a result of those instructions. 1. Records: Include evidence that required inspections or tests have been performed

(including type and number of inspections or tests, nature of defects, causes for rejection, etc.) proposed or directed remedial action, and corrective action taken.

2. Document inspections and tests as required by each section of Specifications. D. Quality Control Plan: Submit with proposed Schedule of Values and Construction Progress

Schedule. Plan shall include: 1. Personnel, procedures, instructions, and records to be used. 2. List of control tests which Contractor understands he or his subcontractors are to

perform. 3. Procedures for reviewing and approving all Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or other submittals before submission to Architect. Include procedures for obtaining field measurements.

4. Method of documenting quality control operation, inspection and testing including samples of proposed forms.

END OF SECTION

01 50 00 - 1 Temporary Facilities and Controls

SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.01 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING A. Service and Distribution: The General Contractor will be allowed to use the existing electrical service

of the facility and will not be required to pay for this electricity. B. Temporary Power: Electrical Contractor shall provide double duplex 120V outlets. Each contractor

shall furnish extension cords necessary to convey electricity from double duplex outlets to portions of the building in which work under their contracts is in progress.

Special power required for welders or other special equipment shall be provided by the trade

requiring such power. C. Temporary Lighting: Electrical Contractor shall provide one light for every 750 square feet or major

portion thereof. Working lights required by trades shall be provided by each trade using plug-in portable lights.

The General Contractor shall be responsible for seeing that all temporary lighting is turned off at

such times as there is no work in progress in the building unless required for security. D. Use of Permanent Systems: After the work is completed to extent that new permanent electric

service is available, contractors may use same as may be necessary for power and light. Temporary facilities shall then be removed by the installing contractor.

Each contractor shall be responsible for any damage to permanent wiring or fixtures as result of his

use of same. Permanent branch circuit wiring may be used to supply pigtail lights if protected by properly sized

circuit breaker or fuse. Permanently installed light fixtures shall be cleaned using method and materials recommended by

the manufacturer. 1.02 TEMPORARY HEAT AND ENCLOSURES Temporary Heat and enclosures should not be required for this project. 1.03 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE No temporary telephone service shall be required. The job superintendent should provide a cell

phone number for communication with the Owner and Architect as necessary during the project. 1.04 TEMPORARY WATER The Owner will make water available to the Contractor for construction purposes, but the General

Contractor shall meter and pay for the water used for construction. Bulk water for site grading shall be provided, metered and paid by the Earthwork Subcontractor.


1.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES The Owner will allow use of the existing facilities, with the agreement from the General Contractor

that these facilities will not be abused or the facilities will not incur an extraordinary amount of traffic resulting in a lot of extra clean up for the janitorial staff.

1.06 FIELD OFFICE AND OTHER TEMPORARY STRUCTURES The General Contractor may provide and maintain a suitable temporary field office for his own use.

Offices and all other temporary structures shall be removed from the site upon completion of the work. A field office is not required, however.

Temporary structures or storage areas used for storage and offices for contractors shall be located

on the site in a orderly manner as determined by the General Contractor and approved by the Owner. The Owner may allow use of the existing building for storage of materials. Please verify and coordinate location with Owner. The Owner is not responsible for any materials being lost or stolen that are improperly stored and secured.

1.07 TEMPORARY PROTECTIVE FACILITIES The General Contractor will provide and maintain the following protective devices and facilities which

are for the protection of the public and the general protection of all workmen on the project: A. Danger signs warning against hazards created by such features of construction as protruding nails,

hoists and falling materials. B. Fire Protection Equipment: The General Contractor shall provide and maintain fire extinguishers and

active fire hydrants where indicated, maintain fire lanes to hydrants and other equipment as necessary for proper fire protection during construction. Such equipment is to be used for fire protection only.

C. The General Contractor and each subcontractor shall provide temporary walks, roadways, trench

covers, barricades, bulkheads, railings, danger lights and signals, etc., required for his work by Federal, State and Municipal safety laws and building codes.

All temporary protective facilities shall be maintained in good condition throughout the term of the

work and at completion of the work they shall be removed and all work damaged thereby shall be repaired and replaced in good condition.

Danger lights shall be kept lighted each night from sunset to sunrise. 1.08 SCAFFOLDING AND RUNWAYS All scaffolding shall be the responsibility of the Contractor requiring same who shall include its cost in

his bid and shall be responsible for its maintenance. The General Contractor shall furnish, erect, and maintain for the safe performance as required, all

runways, guard rails, platforms and similar temporary construction, as he may deem necessary for the performance of the contract. Such facilities shall be of type and arrangement as required for their specific use; shall be substantially constructed throughout, strongly supported, and well secured, and shall comply with all applicable rules and regulations or applicable state and local codes.


1.09 PROTECTION FOR WORK IN PLACE Work in place that is subject to injury because of operations being carried on adjacent shall be

covered, boarded up, or substantially enclosed with adequate protection. Permanent openings used as thoroughfares for the introduction of work and materials to the structure shall have heads, jambs, and sills well blocked and boarded. All forms of protection shall be constructed in a manner such that, upon completion, the entire work will be delivered to the Owner in undamaged condition.

1.10 ACCESS Limit access to necessary routes to perform the work. 1.11 TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances and regulations. B. Noise: Minimize noise near occupied spaces. Properly muffle equipment. Do not operate noisy

equipment during business hours. C. Dust Control: When construction procedures result in dust which becomes nuisance to Owner,

private property or traffic, control said dust. D. Debris Control: Continually police work to prevent collection and scattering of debris uncovered,

loosened, or caused by prosecution of work. E. Pollution Control: Take extreme caution to prevent spilling and littering of water polluting

substances. Do not dump any foreign materials into sewer and storm sewer collection systems. Provide such labor, equipment, and materials as is necessary to remedy such pollution. No burning of debris nor any other air polluting methods or equipment shall be allowed.

1.12 CLEAN UP - DURING CONSTRUCTION Clean-Up During Construction: Each Contractor shall keep the building and premises free from all

surplus material, waste material, dirt and rubbish caused by his employees or work, and at the completion of his work he shall remove all such surplus material, waste material, dirt and rubbish, as well as all his tools, equipment and scaffolding and shall leave his work clean.

Each Contractor shall perform his clean-up daily and shall transport his rubbish to an on-site location designated by the General Contractor who shall arrange for its removal.

END OF SECTION

01 60 00 - 1 Product Requirements

SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. General and Supplementary Conditions 1.02 PRODUCTS A. Products: Include material, equipment and systems.

1. Comply with Specifications and referenced standards as minimum requirements. 2. Components Supplied in Quantity within a Specification Section: Same and

interchangeable. 3. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing structure, except as

specifically required, or allowed, by Contract Documents. 1.03 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transportation: Transport products by methods to avoid product damage; deliver in undamaged

condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging, dry. B. Handling: Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or

damage. C. Inspection: Inspect shipments to assure products comply with requirements, quantities are

correct, and products are undamaged. 1. Reject damaged and defective items.

D. Each Subcontractor: Be responsible for hoisting and stocking of his materials and equipment on

site. 1. Material Stocked on Floors: Palletized or packaged in appropriate containers on floor by

floor basis. 2. Material Stocking: Coordinated with Contractor's superintendent.

1.04 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Storage: Store products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, with seals and

labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weathertight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in well drained area; prevent mixing with

foreign matter. B. Exterior Storage Protection:

1. Fabricated Products: Place on sloped supports above ground. 2. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide

ventilation to avoid condensation. C. Inspection: Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure

products are undamaged, and are maintained under recommended conditions.


1.05 INSTALLATION A. Pre-Installation Conferences: Hold pre-installation meeting at site before installation of each unit

of work which requires coordination with other units of work. Installer and manufacturer's representatives of particular work and affected work shall attend. 1. Notify Architect of meeting time. 2. Discuss coordination of work with other work including Shop Drawings, Product Data,

possible conflicts, compatibility concerns, acceptability of substrates, protection, etc. 3. Record significant discussions at each meeting, agreements, disagreements and final

plan of action. Distribute record to those in attendance and to Architect. 4. Do not proceed with unit of work until pre-installation meeting is successfully concluded

with agreed upon plan of action. B. Inspection of Substrates: Require installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate to

receive work and conditions under which work is to be performed. 1. Installer: Report unsatisfactory conditions to General Contractor in writing with copy to

Architect. 2. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to

satisfaction or installer. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, comply with

manufacturer's applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to extent that these instructions and recommendations are more explicit or more stringent than requirements specified or indicated. 1. Notify Architect of any conflicts between manufacturer's instructions or recommendations

and requirements specified or indicated. D. Attachment: Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work.

1. Secure work true to line and level, and within specified tolerances, or if not specified, industry recognized tolerances.

2. Allow for expansion and building movement. 3. Exposed Joints:

a. Provide uniform joint width. b. Arrange joins to obtain best visual effect. c. Refer questionable visual-effect choices to Architect for final decision.

E. Measurements and Dimensions: Recheck as integral step of starting each installation. F. Climatic Conditions and Project Status: Install each unit of work under conditions to ensure best

possible results in coordination with entire project. 1. Isolate each unit of work from incompatible work as necessary to prevent deterioration. 2. Coordinate enclosure of work with required inspections and tests to minimize necessity of

uncovering work for those purposes. G. Mounting Heights: Where not indicated, mount individual units of work at industry recognized

standard mounting heights for particular application indicated. 1. Refer questionable mounting heights choices to Architect for final decision.

1.06 PRODUCTS LIST A. Submittal: Within 30 days after Notice of Award, transmit three copies of list of major products

which are proposed for installation, including name of manufacturer. 1. Tabulate products by Specifications Section number, title, and Article number.


2. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards.

B. Architect: Will promptly reply in writing whether there is reasonable objection to listed items.

Failure to object to listed item shall not constitute waiver of requirements of Contract Documents. 1.07 PRODUCTS OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only:

1. Any product meeting those standards. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with Substitution Paragraph: Products

of named manufacturers meeting specifications. Submit request for substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named. 1. Products of acceptable manufacturers are subject to requirements of specifications for

specified product. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of named manufacturers

meeting specifications; no options, no substitutions. 1. Products of acceptable manufacturers are subject to requirements of specifications for

specified product. D. Products Specified by Naming Only One Manufacturer: No option; no substitution allowed. 1.08 LIMITATION ON SUBSTITUTIONS A. During Bidding Period: Instructions to Bidders specified times for submitting requests for

substitutions. Submit requests to Architect in compliance with requirements of this section. B. After Bidding Period: Requests for substitutions of products after date of Owner-Contractor

Agreement will be considered only in case of product unavailability or other conditions beyond control of Contractor.

C. Substitutions:

1. Will not be considered when indicated on Shop Drawings or Product Data submittals without separate formal request, when requested directly by Subcontractor or supplier, or when acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. District format for substitutions is required.

2. Do not order or install substitute products without written acceptance. 3. Only one request for substitution for each product will be considered. When substitution

is not accepted, provide specified product. 4. Architect will determine acceptability of substitutions.

1.09 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTIONS A. Submittal: Submit two copies of each request. Submit separate request for each substitution.

1. Identify products by Specifications Section and Article numbers. 2. Provide manufacturer's name and address, trade name of products, and model or catalog

number. 3. List fabricators and suppliers as appropriate.

B. Documentation: Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of

proposed substitution with requirements of Contract documents: 1. Attach Product Data as specified in Section 01 33 00.


2. Give itemized comparison of proposed substitution with specified product, listing variation, and reference to Specification Section and Article numbers.

3. Give quality and performance comparison between proposed substitution and specified product.

4. List availability of maintenance services and replacement materials. 5. State effect of substitution on construction schedule, and changes required in other work

or products. 1.10 CONTRACTOR REPRESENTATION A. Request for Substitution: Representation that Contractor has investigated proposed product and

has determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to specified product: 1. Contractor will provide same warranty for substitution as for specified product. 2. Contractor will coordinate installation of accepted substitute, making such changes as

may be required for work to be complete in all respects. 3. Contractor waives claims for additional costs related to substitution which may later

become apparent. B. Replacement: If substituted products do not meet or exceed above requirements, whether

before, during, or after incorporated into Work, Contractor shall, at no additional cost to Owner, replace substituted products with products originally specified.

1.11 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Architect: Will review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.

1. If accepted by Architect, products proposed for substitution will be accepted subject to modifications by manufacturer, if necessary, to meet detailed requirements of Drawings, and Specifications.

2. Architect will not make exhaustive attempt to determine that products proposed for substitution are equal to, or can be modified in order to be equal to specified products.

B. Architect's Acceptance:

1. During Bidding Period: Architect will record acceptable substitutions in Addenda. Acceptances of substitutions during bid period are conditional upon further investigation after award of contract.

2. After Award of Contract: Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject requested substitution.

C. For Accepted Products: Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples in accordance with

Section 01 33 00. END OF SECTION

01 73 29 - 1 Cutting and Patching

SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Section Includes: All cutting, fitting and patching required to complete the work and to:

1. Make its parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Provide routing penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of piping and

electrical conduit. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Notification of General Contractor: Notify General Contractor well in advance of executing any

cutting or alteration which affects the normal operation of the school. The General Contractor is then responsible for notification of Architect as required. 1. Work of the Owner or any separate contractor. 2. Structural value or integrity of any element of the project. 3. Integrity of effectiveness of weather-exposed or moisture- resistant elements or systems. 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements. 5. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with specifications and standards for each specific product involved. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Existing Conditions: Examine existing conditions of the project, including elements subject to

damage or to movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products or performance of the work.

B. Notification: Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to the Architect. Do not proceed

with the work until the Architect has provided further instructions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure the structural value or

integrity of the affected portion of the work. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the project from damage. 1. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the project which may be exposed

by cutting and patching work.

01 73 29 - 2 Cutting and Patching

3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Openings in construction which are required by other contractors shall be left by crafts

involved. 1. Various Contractors: Be responsible to supply in advance, proper and sufficiently detailed

information. 2. In event of failure to supply this advance information, all cutting as may be required shall

be done only after concurrence of Architect and at expense of negligent party. B. Cutting:

1. Execute cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other work, and will provide proper surfaces to receive installation or repairs.

2. Employ experienced and trained installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching for: a. Weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. b. Sight-exposed finished surfaces.

3. Cut concrete or masonry using a masonry saw or core drill as applicable. Pneumatic tools will not be allowed unless approved by Architect.

C. Fitting: Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide finished installation to comply with

specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes. Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces.

D. Patching: Wherever any pipe, conduit, duct, steel member, bracket, equipment, or other material

penetrates or passes through fire-resistant walls, ceiling or floor, completely seal voids in construction with cement grout, plaster, or fire-resistant material, embedding sealing material full thickness of wall, ceiling or floor.

E. Finishing: Where surfaces are exposed, finish with same materials specified in finish schedule or

material that is not on constructed surfaces. 1. Work: Accomplish with mechanics skilled in finish trade. 2. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finish:

a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection b. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit.

END OF SECTION

01 74 00 - 1 Cleaning and Waste Management

SECTION 01 74 00 CLEANING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT 1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Clean-up During Construction: Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.02 CLEANERS A. Cleaners: Professional cleaners with exception of clean-up of site and cleaning specifically

assigned to installers and applicators under various sections of Specifications. 1.03 FINAL CLEANING A. Exterior: In addition to items specified below, carefully and thoroughly clean all surfaces on

exterior: concrete, metal, etc. B. Glass: Carefully and thoroughly clean both sides of glass and leave absolutely clean and free

from paint, labels, grease, dirt, etc. 1. Cleaners: Professional window cleaners.

C. Hardware: Clean and polish hardware and leave clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. D. Plumbing: Clean and polish plumbing fixtures, fittings and exposed plated piping. Leave clean

and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. Remove labels. E. Electrical: Clean and polish electrical fixtures, including glassware, switch-plates, etc. and leave

clean and free from paint, grease, dirt, etc. F. Equipment: Carefully and thoroughly clean items of equipment, mechanical, electrical, cabinets,

ductwork, etc. Clean permanent air filters and install new air filters as appropriate. G. Floors:

1. Resilient Floor Coverings: Mop with warm water and mild detergent as recommended by manufacturer of flooring, then thoroughly machine buff.

2. Carpeting: Vacuum and clean. Remove all spots as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Concrete Floors: Damp mop or scrub concrete floors as required. 4. Floors: Leave thoroughly clean when building is turned over to Owner.

H. Ceramic and Quarry Tile: Remove grout haze, observing tile manufacturer's recommendations.

Rinse tile work thoroughly with clean water.

I. Ceiling Grid and Tile: Carefully clean dirty and marked ceiling grid and tile. Replace tiles if marks, dirt and blemishes cannot be removed.

1.04 COMPLETION A. Entire Premises Inside and Out: First-class clean condition upon completion before being

accepted by Owner. END OF SECTION

01 77 00-1

Contract Closeout Procedures

SECTION 01 77 00 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1.01 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Refer to the General Conditions for additional criteria and format requirements. B. Procedures: The mandatory sequence of events for acceptance and closeout of

Jefferson County School District, R-1 Capital projects is as follows: 1. Contractor maintains “As Constructed” set of documents at the project site at all

times. 2. Contractor submits “As Constructed” document set to Design Consultant. 3. Design Consultant integrates Contractor information with other documentation of

post-award changes and submits updated text, CAD, and plotted reproducible record documents directly to the Design Consultant at the closeout meeting.

4. Preparation: Before requesting a Final Inspection, the Contractor personally inspects the work to certify completion of all contract requirements and develops: Punch-List of deficiencies by discipline (i.e., Civil, Architectural, HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical, etc.) Partial Punch-Lists by area of construction may be permitted with the approval of the Jefferson County School District, R-1 Project Manager.

5. Written Notification of Project Completion: The Contractor certifies inspection, acceptance, and suitability of the work for the Architect’s Final Inspection and attaches the Punch-List.

6. Final Inspection: Upon receipt of the Written Notification, the Architect schedules a Final Inspection with the Jefferson County School District, R-1 Project Manager to confirm the Punch-List and initiate Project Acceptance. Following this inspection, the Architect prepares and distributes a Final Inspection Report.

7. Notice of Completion: The Contractor advises the Architect in writing that the items identified in the Punch List and Final Inspection Report are complete, inspected, and ready for Final Acceptance.

8. Final Acceptance Inspection: Upon receipt of the Notice of Completion, the Architect schedules a Final Acceptance Inspections with the Contractor and the Jefferson County School District, R-1 Project Manager.

9. Project Closeout Meeting: Contractor schedules a meeting to transmit closeout documents to the Architect, his Prime Consultants with and Jefferson County School District, R-1 Project Manager in attendance.

10. Acceptance: After Punch-List items and closeout submittals have been completed to the satisfaction of the Architect, the Architect issues a written letter to Jefferson County School District, R-1 recommending acceptance of the project. The Architect’s letter of acceptance includes asbestos content certification and the recommended date of acceptance.

11. Final Application for Payment: Upon completion of the Final Acceptance process, the Contractor submits to the Architect: a. Closeout submittals per sections 01 78 00. b. Final Applications for Payment per section 01 78 00.

12. Final Payment: Upon verification of the preceding items: a. The Architect recommends Final Payment.

13. Jefferson County School District, R-1 issues Final Payment after a waiting period following the publication of a formal announcement of Final Payment.

END OF SECTION

01 78 00 - 1 Closeout Submittals

SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 1.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Job site Documents: Maintain at the job site one record copy of the following: 1. Drawings 2. Project Manual

3. Addenda 4. Bid Alternates Accepted

5. Reviewed Shop Drawings 6. Change Orders 7. Other Modifications to Contract

8. Field Test Records 9. Final Site Survey

B. Record Documents: Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Maintain

documents in clean, dry legible condition, apart from documents used for construction. C. Record Information: Label each document "PROJECT RECORD COPY". 1. Mark information with contrasting color using ink. 2. Keep each record current. Do not permanently conceal any work until required

information is recorded. 3. Make the project record documents available at all times for the Owner’s,

Architect’s, or Engineer’s inspection. D. Drawings: Record following information on drawings: 1. Depth of foundation elements. 2. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities. 3. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Changes by change order or field order.

6. Details not on original contract drawings. 7. Cable Systems: Accurately indicate system status including terminations, routing,

and labels. E. Specifications: Record following information on Specifications: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and

items of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes by change order or field order. 3. Other matters not originally specified. F. Shop Drawings: Maintain shop drawings as record documents recording changes made

after review as specified for Drawings above. 1. CAD file, pdf file, and two hard copies plot updated per As-Constructed Record

Construction Drawings are required for:

a. 08 11 00 Steel Doors and Frames 2. Hardcopy reproduction of original approved shop drawings is required for all other specification sections.

G. Submittal: At completion of project, deliver record documents to Architect with transmittal


letter containing date, project title and number, contractor's name and address, title and number of each record document, and certification that each document is complete and accurate. Submittal shall be signed by Contractor.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data and Instructions: Contents:

1. Title Sheet: “Operation and Maintenance Data and Instructions” 2. Project Title 3. Identification of project participants. Include company name, the name of the

business address, telephone, fax, and email address for the following: a. Architect b. Sub Consultant(s) c. Owner: Jefferson County School District R-1 d. Manufacturer(s) e. Contractor/Construction Manager f. Installing Subcontractor g. Supplier, if different from Subcontractor h. Maintenance contractor, if appropriate i. Local source of supply for parts and replacement

4. Table of Contents for each volume, arranged by specification division and section then presented alphabetically within each section. 5. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols consistent with the Contract Documents. 6. General catalog data sheets: Include only those sheets pertinent to the installed product(s). Annotate each sheet to clearly identify the installed product and data

applicable to installation. Delete or overwrite inapplicable information to create a true “as constructed” record.

7. Printed text to supplement product data and organize into a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. Provide logical sequence of instruction for each procedure.

8. List of manufacturer’s recommended spare parts, their current prices and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 9. List proper procedures in event of failure. 10. Itemize conditions, which might affect validity of warranties or bonds. 11. Drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate:

a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow diagrams of devices. c. Correct illustration of completed installation.

12. Diagrams and Charts a. Each subcontractor’s coordination drawings, and as-installed color-

coded diagrams (required by contract, and used in the project). b. Charts of equipment with location and function of each.

13. Instructions for operation, adjustment, maintenance and repair of installed equipment and systems by Jefferson County School District, R-1 personnel.

14. Manufacturers’ Manuals for Equipment and Systems including: a. Description of unit and component parts b. Complete nomenclature and commercial part number of replaceable

parts.


c. Function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions of parts and assemblies.

d. Performance curves, engineering data and tests for pumps larger than 3/4HP and fans greater than 1000 cm. Curves shall include flow rate, pressure, HP, RPM and efficiency.

e. Recommended procedures f. Start-up, break-in, routine lubrication and operating instructions, cautions g. Regulation, control, start/stop, shutdown h. Energy instruction i. Special summer and winter operating cautions j. Maintenance k. Routine care l. Guide to trouble shooting m. Disassembly, repair and reassembly n. Alignment, adjusting and checking o. Water treatment p. List of required lubricants and schedule q. Filter cleaning or replacement schedule r. Maintenance parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams s. Predicted life of parts expected to be replaced

1.03 REINSPECTION FEES A. Re-inspection Fees: Should Contractor fail to complete and correct punch list items such

that additional inspections are required by Architect, Contractor shall pay Architect directly $150.00 per hour for Architect's additional services. If Contractor has any questions with regard to any items on punch list, he shall request clarification before final inspection.

1.04 FINAL PAPERWORK A. Final Paperwork: Prior to release of final payment, Contractor shall deliver the following

items to Architect: 1. Inspection Certificates, as applicable 2. Contractor's Warranty of Materials and Workmanship 3. Maintenance Manuals and Parts Lists, as specified 4. All Guaranties, Warranties and Submittals, as specified 5. Receipts for Extra Materials Delivered to the Owner 6. Final Application for Payment 7. Consent of Surety to Final Payment

8. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens 9. Operations and Maintenance (O & M) Manuals: 3 copies, all tabbed and indexed.

10. Project Record Drawings - Provide 1 Set of Corrected Record Prints showing all modifications to the original construction documents made during construction. Above items are described in the following articles or applicable sections of the specifications. Provide electronic Record Survey of completed Project Site Re: Section 01 71 23 Field Engineering

1.05 INSPECTION CERTIFICATES A. Each Subcontractor: Upon completion of the work, secure in triplicate certificates from

any state or local governing bodies having jurisdiction in dictating that the work is in strict accordance with the applicable codes and deliver same to Contractor for transmittal to


Owner. 1.06 SPARE PARTS

A. Contractor submits required spare parts as in quantifies specified in each section directly to Jefferson County School District, R-1 Project Manager.

1.07 EXTRA STOCK MATERIALS

A. Provide products, spare parts and maintenance materials in quantities specified in each section.

B. For item of work delayed materially beyond the Date of Final Acceptance provide

updated submittal(s) within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing actual date(s) of the start of the warranty period.

C. Contractor submits directly to Jefferson County School District, R-1 Project Manager:

1. Submit draft list within 60 days of contract execution 2. Submit items to Project Manager with transmittal upon project acceptance.

1.08 WARRANTIES A. One Year Correction Period: Remedy any defects due to faulty materials or

workmanship and pay for any damage to other work resulting thereby, which shall appear in work within a period of one year from the date of Notice of Acceptance and in accordance with the terms of any special warranties provided in Contract Documents. Owner shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness.

B. Warranty: Upon completion of work, Contractor shall deliver to Architect in duplicate,

written warranty based on provision of Contract Documents properly signed and notarized.

1. Address warranty to Owner. 2. Provide separate written warranties from mechanical and electrical

subcontractors. C. Subcontractor Warranties: Include labor and material, signed by manufacturer or

Subcontractor as case may be and countersigned by Subcontractor. 1. Address warranties to Owner. 2. Deliver to Architect upon completion of project and before or with submission of

request for final payment. D. Extended Warranties: Deliver in duplicate extended warranties as specified and dated

from date of Notice of Acceptance and signed by subcontractors and manufacturers. E. Manufacturer Warranties: Deliver in duplicate manufacturer's warranties as specified and

dated from date of Notice of Acceptance signed by manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer's Warranties: Supplement and not replace implied and express

warranties provided for by Uniform Commercial Code. Any statements in manufacturer's warranties denying or limiting responsibility for such implied and express warranties shall be void.

END OF SECTION

02 41 19 - 1 Selective Structure Demolition

SECTION 02 41 19

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. For each phase of construction, erect dustproof enclosures separating occupied from unoccupied areas before beginning demolition. Remove enclosures when work is completed and patch surfaces damaged by work.

2. All materials and equipment that are required to be removed and not salvaged by the Owner prior to the start of demolition, shall become part of the demolition work to be performed by the Contractor.

3. Remove designated partitions; walls, ceilings, floors, doors and frames, windows, ductwork, piping and other building components.

5. Provide necessary shoring and bracing. 6. Dispose of debris off site. 7. Clean up and leave building and site prepared for renovation and additions.

B. Related Sections:

1. Barricades, Warning Lights and Signs: Section 01 50 00 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.

2. Use of Premises: Section 01 11 00 Summary of Work. 3. Phasing of Project: Section 01 11 00 and drawings. 4. Alteration Project Procedures: Section 01 35 16. 5. Existing Hardware Salvage: Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware.

1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Execute demolition in a manner that will limit unnecessary dust and

noise. Burning of materials on site is not permitted. Comply with all applicable environmental regulations.

B. Existing Conditions: Portions of the building will be occupied during construction. See Section 01 11

00 Summary of Work. Do not interfere with use of occupied portions of building. Maintain free and safe passage to and from occupied areas.

C. Existing Utility Services:

1. Capping: Arrange and pay for disconnecting, removing and capping utility services within areas of demolition. Disconnect and stub off. Notify affected utility company in advance and obtain approval before starting this work.

2. Identification: Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services. Identify lines and capping locations on project record documents.

3. Notify the Owner a minimum of 48hrs. in advance of any utility interruption. D. Protection: Provide necessary temporary shoring and bracing to support and protect portions of

existing building during demolition operations. Leave such shoring in place until permanent supports have been installed and inspected by the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the design, safety and adequacy of temporary shoring and bracing and its ability to carry the load for which intended.


E. Safety: Cease operations and notify Architect immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to properly support structure. Do not resume until safety is restored.

F. Asbestos: The Owner will have asbestos containing material removed under a separate contract.

Notify the Owner immediately of any asbestos containing materials remaining requiring removal. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials to be Reused: Carefully remove materials, specialty items, equipment, casework, etc.

scheduled or noted to be reused in other portions of work and store at site for later reinstallation. Repair any damage caused during removal, storage or reinstallation to the satisfaction of the Architect.

B. Door hardware to be Salvaged : Salvage, box and deliver existing door hardware per Door Hardware

Section 08 71 00. C. Materials to be removed by Owner: Items which are removed prior to the start of demolition will

remain the property of the Owner. All other items indicated to be removed but not indicated for reinstallation shall become property of Contractor who shall remove from the site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Exterior Openings: Erect weatherproof closures for exterior openings. B. Dust Protection: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions as required to prevent spread of dust, fumes

and smoke to other parts of the building. On completion, remove partitions and repair damaged surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.

C. Building Occupancy: Carry out demolition work to cause as little inconvenience to occupants as

possible. 1. Do not operate very noisy equipment such as jack hammers during normal school hours.

3.02 BUILDING DEMOLITION A. General: It will be the General Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate the amount and

timing of the demolition with the abatement contractor so that the facility will be secure at the close of each day.

B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner as required to accommodate all of new work. Protect

existing foundations and supporting structural members. C. Repair: Repair demolition performed in excess of that required at no cost to the Owner. 3.03 CLEAN UP A During the demolition operations, keep the premises free from accumulations of waste material or

rubbish caused by employees or work, and at the daily completion of the work remove rubbish, tools


and surplus material and leave the premises clean and ready for subsequent work. Promptly remove all waste, rubbish or debris from the site.

END OF SECTION

06 10 00 - 1 Rough Carpentry

DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Miscellaneous blocking and furring. 2. Rough hardware. 3. Blocking in walls for support of toilet and bath accessories, door stops, wall cabinets and

other cabinetry items. 4. FR Plywood backboards at IDFand MDF rooms and other locations as shown. 5. All other rough carpentry work not specified elsewhere. 6. Blocking.

B. Products Furnished but not Installed Under This Section:

1. Anchors Built into Concrete or Masonry for Support of Wood Framing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards:

1. Wood Framing: Comply with requirements of Uniform Building Code and "National Design Specification for Wood Construction", 1997 edition, as published by National Forest Products Association (NFPA).

2. Lumber: Comply with Grading Rules for Lumber, latest edition, published by Western Wood Products Association.

3. Plywood: Conform to (APA) plywood design specification PDS 1986. Comply with US Department of Commerce Product Standard PS1-83 for Construction and Industrial Plywood.

4. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC) 5. National Particleboard Association (NPA) F. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA)

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Grade Stamps:

1. Lumber: Each piece shall be WWPA or WCLIB grade stamped. 2. Plywood: Each panel shall be identified with grade trademark of the American Plywood

Association 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Stack all materials minimum of 6" above ground to insure proper ventilation and cover with

waterproofing and covering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FRAMING LUMBER A. General Requirements: Sound, thoroughly seasoned, surfaced four sides, well manufactured

and free from warp not correctable by bridging, blocking or nailing. All wood products used must comply with IBC 2303.2 requirements for fire resistive treated wood tested to ASTM E 84, a listed flame spread of 25 or less & labeled per 2303.2.1.


B. Stress Grades: All lumber shall comply with stress grade rating indicated in the general notes on the structural drawings.

C. Moisture Content: Maximum of 19%. D. Blocking: Douglas fir-larch or hem-fir, standard grade or better, fire retardant treated. Nominal 2 x

6 or wider. Pressure treated lumber is required at exposed, wet, and damp locations such as sills, plates, curbs, and cants.

E. Furring: Douglas fir-larch or hem-fir, standard grade or better.

F. All wood products used for construction shall be fire retardant treated, which includes blocking and nailers, and wall sheathing.

2.02 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Timber Engineering Co. 2. Simpson Co. 3. or “District Approved” Equal

B. General: Provide with nails and bolts according to manufacturer's requirements. C. Types: As indicated on Drawings. 2.03 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Nails: Common wire nail length and diameters. Do not use box nails. Threaded hardened steel

nails or screws may be substituted for common size nails of corresponding size. Galvanized nails shall be hot dip galvanized ASTM A153.

B. Bolts and Lag Screws: Common bolts and screws, ASTM A307. Exterior shall be hot dip

galvanized. C. Steel Plates and Straps: ASTM A36, size as indicated. Weld plates together with 3/16" fillet

welds all sides and full length of contact surfaces unless noted. Use E60 or E70 welding electrodes. Prime with shop paint. Exterior shall be hot dip galvanized.

D. Staples: Not allowed. 2.04 POWER DRIVEN ANCHORS Ramset or equivalent low or standard velocity driven fasteners, minimum 3/16" shank diameter.

Length as required to penetrate steel or wood member and 1-1/4" into concrete or masonry. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Existing Conditions: Verify that surfaces to receive rough carpentry are prepared

to required grades and dimensions. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 GENERAL Cooperate with other trades. Provide required grounds, blocking, wood backing and framing.

Perform necessary cutting and patching of rough carpentry work as required.


3.03 ROUGH HARDWARE Provide and install rough hardware and metal fastenings as indicated, specified or required for

proper installation of rough carpentry. Nails, spikes, screws and bolts and similar items shall be sizes and types to properly secure members in place.

3.04 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General:

1. Nail or spike members in accordance with Uniform Building Code. Framing 16" o.c. unless indicated otherwise.

2. Cut framing square on bearings, closely fit, accurately set to required lines and levels. Secure rigidly in place at bearings and connections. Do not use shims for leveling on wood or metal bearings. Use steel shims with full bearing on masonry or concrete.

3. Frame members for passage of pipes and ducts to avoid cutting structural members. Do not cut, notch or bore framing members for passage of pipes or conduits without Architect's permission. Reinforce framing members as directed where damaged by cutting.

4. Firestop concealed spaces in framing. Use 2" thick accurately fit wood blocking to fill opening.

B. Fasteners:

1. Where splitting is likely to occur causing a reduction in member or connection capacity, pre-bore nail holes 1/2 size of nail diameter and use threaded hardened steel nails.

2. Bolts: Bolt holes shall be 1/16" to 1/32" larger than the bolt diameter. Carefully center bolt hole between side plates and main members. Provide standard washers between wood and bolt heads or nuts.

C. Anchors: Anchor carpentry work to masonry or concrete where required. Anchors as follows

unless indicated otherwise: 1. Wall Plates: 1/2" x 8" bolts with washers at 4' o.c. 2. Metal Framing Anchors: As specified or indicated.

3.05 WOOD BLOCKING Install blocking of size required (minimum 2x6) for support of handrails, toilet and bath

accessories, wall-mounted door stops, wall cabinets, marker boards, other wall-mounted accessory items, plumbing fixtures, and surface mounted systems devices. Set true to line, level or plumb well secured in stud wall and flush with back of drywall or other wall finish.

END OF SECTION

07 60 00 - 1 Flashing and Sheet Metal

SECTION 07 60 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Flashing and Counterflashing 2. Other sheet metal flashing related to the above, indicated on the Drawings and not specified

elsewhere. B. Related Sections:

1. Wood Blocking and Nailers: Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 2. Flashing at Windows: Section 08 41 00 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Sealants: Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealers. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01090. Comply with following:

1. "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual", 1996 (or latest) edition, as published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA).

2. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) Roofing and Waterproofing Manual, 1995 (or latest) edition.

3. Factory Mutual Data Sheet 1-28 for Class I-90 and IBC 2003. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Include:

1. Manufacturers technical product data, installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01 30 00. Include:

1. Overall layout of sheet metal work. 2. Type, thickness, and details of sheet metal components. 3. Joints, expansion joints, attachment and anchoring of sheet metal components.

C. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01 77 00. D. Sample Submittals:

1. 6” or 12” square samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces complete with specified finish.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: Comply with:

1. Wind Resistance: Comply with IBC 2003 and other applicable standards.


1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Before fabricating sheet metal, verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to

be covered. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide one year written warranty covering materials and installation for sheet metal in

accordance with Section 01 77 00. 1. Include that system shall be watertight and weatherproof. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METAL A. Galvanized Iron: ASTM A526-80 commercial quality sheet steel, ASTM A525-83, G90 commercial

hot-dip galvanizing. Provide gauges as indicated and specified, 22 gauge minimum. Factory finished at all exposed locations and typical at parapet cap, scupper pan and miscellaneous flashings. 1. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Finish: Kynar 500 as indicated on the drawings.

B. Aluminum: .060 mill finish aluminum flashings with clear anodized finish at aluminum doors, window

flashings, at all aluminum curtain wall and storefront systems, at all composite panel locations and at all other locations as shown on the Drawings.

2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIAL A. Clips or Cleats: Same material and gauge as sheet metal being installed. B. Nails and Fasteners: Same metal as metal being installed or other non-corrosive metal as

recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. C. Solder: ASTM B32-83, 1/2 lead, 1/2 tin. Use rosin for flux. D. Sealant: “District Approved” type of polyurethane; see Section 07 92 00. Roofers mastic is not

acceptable. 2.03 REGLETS A. Reglets: Fry Reglet Corp., type as required, 24 gauge galvanized steel. Kynar 500 finish. No

surface-mounted reglets permitted without prior approval. B. Accessories: Provide prefabricated mitered corners and lap joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01 60 00

1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Examine surfaces to receive flashing or sheet metal. Surfaces shall be smooth, sound,

clean and dry and fabric flashing in place before work is started. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to


Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Coordinate work of this Section with work of other sections. Verify placement of wood

blockings, inserts, nailing strips, cants, etc. B. Protective Coating: Coat contacting dissimilar metals with asphaltic compound. 3.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Reference Standards: See Section 01 42 19. Comply with following:

1. Unless indicated otherwise on Drawings, workmanship and details shall comply with NRCA Manual and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, and FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49.

B. Edges:

1. Edges: Hem all exposed edges 1/2 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2. Drips: Angle bottom edges of vertical surfaces to form drips.

C. Joints: Make joints watertight and allow for expansion.

1. Reinforce sheet metal corners as required. 2. Reinforcement: Conceal within finished assembly.

D. Fastenings: Use continuous concealed hook strips and fasteners. Exposed hook strips and

fasteners not acceptable. E. Expansion and Contraction:

1. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction and building movement in completed work. 2. Make watertight and weathertight throughout. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, provide expansion joints at maximum of 20 feet and not more

than four feet from corners. Seal joints with sealant in accordance with Section 07 92 00. F. Separation of Materials:

1. Provide for permanent separation of metal from noncompatible metal or other corrosive substrates by coating or lining concealed surfaces with materials as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.

3.04 SHEET METAL A. Flashing and Counterflashing: As needed of 22 gauge galvanized iron. Lock and solder joints and

hem exposed edges. 3.05 REGLET FLASHING A. General: Install reglet and counterflashing as recommended by manufacturer. Seal top edge of

reglet with sealant.

END OF SECTION

07 92 00 - 1 Joint Sealers

SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Providing all caulking and sealant indicated on the Drawings, specified herein,

and not specified under other sections. In general, seal all openings shown on the Drawings and at other locations requiring sealant to seal visually and against infiltration from air and water, including but not limited to the following: 1. Construction and expansion joints in concrete floor slabs and other toppings 2. Flashing reglet and retainers 3. Exterior wall joints 4. Masonry control joints 5. Isolation joints, between structure and other elements 6. Joints at penetrations of walls, decks and floors by piping and other service and

equipment 7. Joints between items of equipment and other construction 8. Joints between door and window frames and adjacent materials, exterior and interior 9. Bedding for all door thresholds 10. Open joints between dissimilar materials as required to close and conceal jointing of the

work 11. Construction and expansion joints, joints between dissimilar material; joints around

windows, door frames, louvers, and other penetrations and openings in the exterior wall; interior walls as detailed or specified

12. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections:

1. Sealants Related to Flashing: Section 07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal. 2. Glazing Sealants: Section 08 81 00 Glazing.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 for each material and location of

application. B. Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittals for each material and location

of application. C. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Warranty: Submit in accordance with Section 01 77 00. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Company specializing in sealant application.

1. Experience: Continuously installed sealants in State of Colorado for five years. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative: Obtain materials from only manufacturers who will, if

required, send a qualified technical representative to project site, for the purpose of advising the installer of proper procedures and precautions for the use of the materials.


1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01 60 00. Deliver in original, unopened containers and store in an

area not subject to extreme heat or cold. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply exterior sealants during wet weather or when the outside

temperature is below 40 Degrees F. Do not apply interior sealants when the inside temperature is below 60 Degrees F.

1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide three year written warranty covering materials and installation for sealants in

accordance with Section 01 77 00. 1. Warranty: Require installer, at no cost to Owner, to repair or replace sealants which fail to

perform as air-tight joints; or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, or general durability; or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified as an inherent quality of the material by submitted manufacturer's data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 JOINT BACKING MATERIAL A. General: Size joint backing material for minimum 30% compression when inserted in the joint.

Material: Round rod or semi-circular type. B. Manufacturers:

1. Dow Chemical Company, Ethafoam 2. Sonneborn, Sonofoam 3. Schlegel Manufacturing Company, Schlegelfoam 4. Denver Foam 5. “District Approved” Substitute in accordance with Section 01 60 00.

2.02 SEALANT MATERIAL A. Manufacturers:

1. DAP Incorporated 2. Parr, Inc. 3. Pecora Corporation 4. Products Research and Chemical Corporation 5. Sonneborn Building Products 6. Tremco Manufacturing Company 7. Mameco International 8. W.R. Grace and Company 9. Sika Corp. 10. “District Approved” Substitute in accordance with Section 01 60 00.

B. Silicone Sealant Manufacturers:

1. General Electric 2. Dow Corning 3. Accepted substitute in accordance with Section 01 60 00.


C. Acceptable Materials: 1. Interior and Under Thresholds: Latex Acrylic, ASTM C834-91 (1981). 2. All Exterior Horizontal Caulking: Two-component polyurethane, FS TT-S-00227E, Type

II, Class A, non-sag 3. Primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer 4. Sealant at Interior Concrete Floor Slabs and Tile Joints: Two-component self-leveling

polyurethane, FS TT-S-00227E, Type I, Class A, not pourable type, Mameco Volkem 245. 5. Sealant at Lavatories: Silicon tub sealant. 6. Colors: As selected by Architect from standard colors.

2.03 BOND BREAKER TAPE A. Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by the sealant manufacturer to be

applied to sealant-contact surfaces where bond to the substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape wherever applicable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01 60 00:

1. Inspect joints to be sealed to application of any work under this section. 2. Notification: Notify General Construction of any joints which cannot be put into proper

condition to receive sealants in writing with copy to Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Preparation of Surfaces:

1. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Mask edges, if required, to protect adjoining surfaces and produce a straight finish line. 3. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant. Remove dirt, insecure

coatings, moisture and other substances which would interfere with bond of sealant. 4. Do not proceed with installation of sealant over joint surfaces which have been painted,

lacquered, waterproofed or treated with water repellent or other treatment of coating. Remove coating or treatment joint surfaces before installing sealant.

5. Etch concrete masonry joint surfaces to remove excess alkalinity unless sealant manufacturer's printed instruction indicates that alkalinity does not interfere with sealant bond and performance. Etch with 5% solution of muriatic acid, neutralize with diluted ammonia solution, rinse thoroughly with water & allow to dry before sealant installation.

B. Priming: If required, prime all surfaces which are to be sealed with manufacturer's recommended

or standard primer, after the surfaces have been prepared as specified. Before use, check primers for discoloration and dirt pick-up on adjacent surfaces. If staining occurs, after exposure, take adequate measures to prevent the primer from being applied over the face of adjacent porous materials by masking or other suitable measures.

C. Joint Backing:

1. Joints: Depth necessary to provide for the specified allowable thickness of sealant and also the required backing where and as specified. Provide backing of extent and type as specified and needed to provide for the allowable depth of the sealant.

2. Back-up Materials for Sealants: Non-staining, compatible with the sealant and primer, resilient nature, and as recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant.


a. Size and Shape: As required by width of joint and specified. b. Do not use materials impregnated with oil, solvents or bituminous materials.

3. Compress backing material minimum of 30% when inserted in joint. Backing material for upper portion of joints shall be round rod or semi-circular in cross-section with arc in contact with sealant.

D. Bond Breaker Tape: Install where indicated and as required by manufacturer's recommendations

to ensure that sealants will perform properly. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Exterior Metal Sills: Set in full bed of polyurethane sealant. B. Exterior Thresholds: Set in full bed of latex acrylic sealant. C. Seal Joints:

1. Apply sealants in continuous beads without open joints, voids or air pockets, using a ratchet hand gun or mechanical powered gun.

2. Confine sealants to joint areas with masking tapes or other precautions. Apply compounds in concealed compression joints accurately so that excess compound will extrude from joints.

3. Remove excess compound or sealant promptly as work progresses, and clean adjoining surfaces.

4. In rough surfaces or joints of uneven widths, install sealant well back into joint. Recess equal to width of joint, or 3/8" minimum at masonry.

5. Use anti-tack agent where necessary to protect freshly applied sealant from public traffic and dirt.

6. Slightly recess joints to facilitate a painter's line. Handtool and finish joints throughout construction.

7. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. F. Workmanship: Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants will be

deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of the joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly

below adjoining surfaces. 2. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint to

form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. G. Joint Sizes: Install sealants to depths as indicated, or as recommended by sealant manufacturer

but within the following general limitations: 1. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic, fill joints

to a depth equal to 50% of joint width, but not more than 1/2" deep or less than 1/4" deep. 2. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and caulking compounds, fill joints to a

depth in the range of 75% to 125% of joint width. H. Spillage:

1. Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into the voids of adjoining surfaces. Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of adjoining surfaces, by either the primer/sealer or the sealant.

2. Remove excess and spillage of compounds promptly as the work progresses. Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of spillage. Do not damage the adjoining surfaces or finishes.


3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Samples: Where directed by the Architect, cut out and remove a total of three samples consisting

of the undisturbed sealant and back-up material from joint. Samples shall be 6" in length. Reseal cut out areas with the same materials.

3.05 CURING, PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Curing: Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions

and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability.

B. Protection:

1. Subcontractor shall advise General Contractor of procedures required for the protection of sealants during construction period, so that they will be without deterioration or damage (other than normal weathering) at time of the acceptance.

2. Protect surfaces from damage. Clean soiled surfaces immediately. Replace any damaged material which cannot be cleaned with new material.

END OF SECTION

08 11 00 - 1 Steel Doors and Frames

DIVISION 08 OPENINGS SECTION 08 11 00 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hollow Metal Doors 2. Hollow Metal Frames 3. Hollow Metal Borrowed Lights 4. Hollow Metal Entrances 5. Window Insert in Hollow Metal Door 6. Other Hollow Metal Items B. Related Sections: 1. Hardware including Thresholds, Removable Mullions and Weatherstripping:

Section 08 71 00 Finish Hardware 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01 60 00. Comply with following: 1. NAAMM Standard HMMA 861. 2. ANSI A115 Specifications for Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Exterior hollow metal frames shall be designed by a professional

engineer registered in the State of Colorado to resist a windload of 27.5 psf with a maximum deflection not to exceed L/180. Provide internal reinforcing as required to meet these requirements. Design calculations shall be available to the Architect on request.

1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. Templates: Hardware templates for hardware mounted on hollow metal work shall be

submitted under Section 08 71 10 directly to hollow metal manufacturer immediately after approval of hardware schedule. Report failure to receive templates with reasonable promptness to General Contractor.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Fire Rating: Provide fire rating label acceptable to local building code authority on

doors and frames indicated on the door schedule. If any door or frame scheduled to be fire-rated cannot qualify for appropriate labeling because of its design, hardware or any other reason, advise Architect prior to submission of bids. Field modifications of any kind to fire rated units is prohibited.

2. NFPA Standard No. 80.


1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01 60 00. Store frames in manner to prevent twisting.

Doors with dimples or dents will be rejected. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DOOR AND FRAME MANUFACTURERS A. Standard Steel Doors: 1. Rocky Mountain Metals 2. Southwestern Hollow Metals 3. Gateway Metal Products 4. Hol-O-Met Corporation, Mesa 5. North Central Supply 6. Curries Manufacturing 7. Elco Metal Products 8. Steelcraft 9. “District Approved” Substitute in accordance with Section 01 60 00. 2.02 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Frames for hollow metal and wood doors, entrances, windows and borrowed

lights, etc. indicated to be hollow metal shall be of design sections as detailed and assembled as indicated.

B. Gauges: 1. Frames on Exterior Walls: 14 gauge steel. 2. Frames on Interior Walls: 16 gauge steel. 3. Loose Glazing Beads: Not less than 20 gauge steel, corners butted. C. Construction: Construct frames encompassing one or more doors with sidelights or

transoms, and steel window walls, etc., in rigid units of as large size as practical to reduce to a minimum the number of job-fabricated joints.

1. Joints and Connections Including Job-Fabricated Joints: Welded and ground and the entire assembly reinforced and braced as required to insure absolute rigidity.

2. Provide expansion joints as indicated or required. 3. Where so indicated or as required, provide channel stiffening within the securely

welded to frame member. 4. Do not use exposed screws except where specifically accepted. D. Accessories: 1. Reinforcement for Hardware: Machine frames for attachment of hardware,

including mortising, reinforcing, drilling and tapping for hinges. a. Butt Hinges: 7 gauge, 12" long, full width of frame profile less width of 1

backbend. b. Closers: 10 gauge, 12" long, full width of frame. c. Strikes, Flush Bolts and Other Surface Mounted Hardware: 12 gauge. 2. Anchors: Furnish anchors of type and number required for anchoring frames to

structure, partitions, etc., as follows: a. 3 jamb anchors on 7' high jamb b. 4 jamb anchors on jambs over 7' Wire anchors will not be allowed. Expansion bolt anchors shall be 3/8” diameter

x 5” length countersunk flat head at new frames in existing openings, with specific


authorization. Provide all installation instructions as necessary to insure proper installation of anchors.

3. Silencers: Drill stop of lock jamb of each interior frame for installation of pneumatic rubber door silencers. Silencers are to be furnished under Section 08 71 00, quantity as indicated on the Door Hardware Schedule.

4. Joints: Conceal welded joints in two-sided mullions or similar sections behind glazing stops. Continuous weld and grind smooth exposed joints.

5. Glazing Stops: Provide removable metal stops, screwed to frame, at borrowed lights and window walls. See Section 08 81 00 for glazing clearance requirements.

a. Unless indicated otherwise, glazing stops shall be 18 ga. 5/8" x 3/4" or 3/4" x 3/4" cold-rolled channel, shaped as required or detailed and hand fitted to each opening, mitered and welded.

b. Butt Joints: Square and true and tightly fitted. c. Fasten to frame with metal screws 18" o.c., flathead, countersunk. Do

not over-tighten to cause indentations or puckering at screws. Use vandalproof screws at exterior stops.

E. Hinges: Install mortar protection box behind each hinge cut. 2.03 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Doors indicated to be hollow metal shall be hollow metal, flush, swing type

doors of the types shown.

B. Materials 1. Interior doors: ANSI/SDI-A250 Level 3 Heavy Duty; 16 gauge face except as itemized below. 2. Exterior doors: ANSI/SDI-A250 Level 4 Extra Heavy Duty; 14 gauge face and internal stiffeners are required at the following locations:

a. Exterior entrances b. Gymnasium, Locker Room, Athletic area exterior doors c. Other exterior high-traffic /abuse/security locations

B. Construction: Manufacture hollow metal doors and panels with 18 gauge top channel, 18

ga. recessed or concave bottom channel. Flush tops, sides and bottoms. Plastic inserts are not acceptable. Mitered, fully welded construction. Lock seams or epoxy filled seams are not acceptable.

C. Labels: Provide fire-rated construction and UL labels where listed in the door schedule. D. Hardware: Mortise and reinforce doors to receive hardware: 1. Hinges: 7 gauge steel plate, 9" long, welded to continuous 16 gauge interior edge

channels. Drill and tap. Use of coined or extruded holes not acceptable. 2. Locks, Latches, Push/Pulls, and Panic Devices: 12 gauge steel spot welded to

16 gauge interior edge channels and designed to provide adequate support and reinforcement for required hardware.

3. Closers: Not less than 12 gauge internal reinforcement. Provide special attention to reinforcing doors where closers are to be bolted through door.

E. Insulation: 3-lb mineral or glass wool type. Honeycomb core is not acceptable.


2.04 WINDOW INSERT IN HOLLOW METAL DOOR A. Manufacturer: Bug Blocker as Manufactured by Rasco Industries, Inc. or “District

Approved” equal.

B. Product: Service Door Screen Insert (SDSI) with: 1. Construction: 6063 – T6 mill finish aluminum 2. Size: 25” W x 35” H 3. Frame installed with tamper-proof screws 4. Screen: 304 S.S. 12 x 12 mesh 5. Options: 3/8” thickness clear polycarbonate panel 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Provide all closures, sub-sills, panels, fillers, etc., indicated as hollow metal, gauges and

insulation as indicated. 2.06 FINISH A. Cleaning and Primer: 1. Thoroughly clean all surfaces of grease, rust and scale to insure paint

adherence. Apply filler to doors where required to produce a smooth surface. 2. Doors and Frames to be Painted: Apply one coat of factory primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Frames: 1. Set steel frames accurately in accordance with details, straight and free of twist

with head level and jambs plumb. Rigidly anchor to walls and partitions and securely brace until surrounding work is completed. Provide deflection clearances at frame heads where indicated.

2. Fire-Rated Openings: Place frames and provide clearances in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80.

3. Field Welds: Make welds full length of joints. Remove splatter and grind exposed welds to match adjacent surfaces. Provide Architect with ample notice to review welds before finish operations begin.

4. Wherever possible leave spreader bars in place until frames are anchored. 5. Jambs shall be filled with grout under Section 04 21 00 where frames occur in

masonry walls. 6. Provide expansion bolt masonry anchorage devices where required for securing

hollow metal frames to in-place masonry construction. Set anchorage devices opposite each anchor location in accordance with details on accepted shop drawings and anchorage device manufacturer's recommendations. Countersink bolts, fill, grind smooth and prime prior to painting.

7. Field modification or machining of labeled doors is prohibited except as permitted by NFPA 80.

B. Doors: Apply hardware in conformance with hardware manufacturer's templates and

instructions. Hang doors to be free of binding with all hardware functioning properly. 1. Clearance Tolerances: a. Head: 3/32 preferred, 1/8 inch maximum b. Jamb: 1/8 inch maximum


c. Between Doors (Pair): 1/8 inch maximum d. Sill without Threshold: 1/2 inch maximum, or as required by local building

codes.

C. Window Insert: Install per manufacturer’s recommendations using tamper-proof screws.

D. Miscellaneous Items: Install closures, panels, fillers, etc. as indicated. At completion of job, adjust doors and hardware as required and leave in proper operating condition.

END OF SECTION

08 71 00 - 1 FINISH HARDWARE

SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.

B. Hardware specified herein is to cover all necessary material required to fully complete the hardware requirements of specified openings. It is the intention that the hardware specified shall be of sufficient quantities necessary to complete the Work. Notify the Architect of omissions or discrepancies prior to bid date for clarifications or instructions. Adjustments to the Contract Sum will not be allowed for omissions not clarified prior to bid opening.

C. This Section includes the following:

1. Hinges.

2. Lock cylinders and keys.

3. Lock and latch sets.

4. Exit devices.

5. Electronic security hardware.

6. Push/pull units.

7. Closers, hold open devices interfaced with Fire/Life Safety Systems.

8. Overhead holders.

9. Miscellaneous door control devices.

10. Door trim units.

11. Protection plates.

12. Weatherstripping for exterior doors.

13. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors.

14. Thresholds.

D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1) Division 08 - Finish Carpentry: Finish Hardware Installation.

2) Division 08 - Joint Sealers – exterior thresholds.


3) Division 08 - Metal Doors and Frames.

4) Division 28- Fire/Life-Safety System.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A117.1 – Specifications for making buildings and facilities usable by physically handicapped people.

B. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990

C. DHI – Door and Hardware Institute

D. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association

1. NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows

2. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code

3. NFPA 105 – Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies

4. NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

E. UL – Underwriters Laboratories

1. UL10C – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies (Positive Pressure)

2. UL 305 – Panic Hardware

F. WHI – Warnock Hersey Incorporated

1. SDI – Steel Door Institute

2. WDMA Industry Standard I.S. 1-A-97 (Window & Door Manufacturers Association).

3. AWI Quality Standards 8th Edition, Version 1.0 2003.

4. ANSI A115. W Series, Wood Door Hardware Standards. (American National Standard Institute)

5. NAAMM – National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers

1.03 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS

A. SUBSTITUTIONS: Product and models that are specified are manufacturers products listed within these design criteria, bid only on those items. No consideration will be given to substitution during bid period.

B. SUBMITTALS: Submit six copies of schedule per Division 1. Organize vertically formatted schedule into “Hardware Sets” with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include following information:

1) Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of hardware items. Use BHMA Finish codes per ANSI A156.18.


2) Name, part number and manufacturer of each item.

3) Fastenings and other pertinent information

4) Location of hardware set coordinated with floor plans and door schedule

5) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

6) Mounting locations for hardware.

7) Door and frame sizes, materials and maximum degrees of swing.

8) List of manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address and phone numbers.

9) Catalog cuts.

10) Manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for electronic hardware.

11) Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with closeout documents, including keying schedule, wiring/riser diagrams, manufacturers’ installation, adjustment and maintenance information, and hardware consultant’s final inspection report.

C. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.

D. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

E. Furnish two, (2), copies of maintenance manuals for each different hardware item, including operation and maintenance instructions, parts listing with sources indicated; recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions, and similar information. Include all diagnostic and repair information available to manufactures and installers maintenance personnel. Submit for Owners information at Project closeout as specified in Division 1. Comply with Sections 01650 and 01700.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.

1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.


B. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.

C. Fire-Rated Openings: In compliance with NFPA 80. Hardware UL10C/UBC-7-2 (positive pressure) compliant for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, non-flaming door closers, approved-bearing hinges, plus resilient and required intumescent seals. Furnish openings complete.

1) Note: specified seals may exceed selected door manufacturer’s requirements. See “Thresholds, Weatherstripping and Seals” for clarification.

2) Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort.

D. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, (with supplementary marking on door label indicating “Fire Door to be Equipped with “Fire Exit Hardware”), provide label on exit device indicating “Fire Exit Hardware”.

1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package

B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. As hardware supplier from various manufacturers receives material, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule.

C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct.

D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site).

E. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.

1.06 SEQUENCING AND COORDINATION:

A. Coordinate with concrete.

B. Reinforce walls.

C. Coordinate finish floor materials and floor-mounted hardware.

D. Conduit and raceways as needed for electrical, electronic and electro-pneumatic hardware items. Fire/life-safety system interfacing. Point-to-point wiring diagrams plus riser diagrams to related trades.

E. Furnish manufacturer templates to door and frame fabricators.


F. Use hardware consultant to check Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for proper hardware installation.

1. Confirm that door manufacturers furnish necessary UBC-7-2 compliant seal packages.

1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. Present special tools and maintenance instructions to Owner at time of testing and demonstration interval.

B. General Warranty: Warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

C. Hardware Manufacturers Warranty: All hardware shall be free of defects and imperfections in manufacture and finish. Hardware shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer to perform all the various functions required for, twenty-four, 24 months from date of Final Completion.

D. Provide the following special warranty for the following items:

1. Locksets, cylinders and latchsets: 7 years.

2. Door Closers: 10 years.

3. Exit devices: 3 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Butts and Hinges:

a) Ives Hinges: 5BB1 5BB1HW.

b) McKinney Hinge: TA2714 T4A3786.

c) Stanley Hinge: FBB179 FBB168.

2. Key Control System:

a) Schlage Lock: Interface with Owner’s existing E keyway.

3. Locksets, Latchsets and Deadbolts:


a) Schlage Lock: ND Vandlgard Series Rhodes Lever Design.

4. Exit Devices:

a) Von Duprin: Match existing 99 Series.

5. Door Closers:

a) LCN: match existing 4041-EDA.

6. Magnetic Holders:

a) ABH: 2100 Series (Thru-Bolted).

b) LCN: SEM7800 Series (Thru-Bolted).

7. Door Stops:

a) Ives: WS406 FS495 470 436/438.

b) Rockwood: 407/408 494 455 440/441.

c) Triangle Brass: W1274CCS 1254 1245 1210/1212.

8. Door Stripping, Seals and Threshold:

a) Pemko 272A 45041CNB 18041CNB 3452CNB S88D.

b) National Guard 613A A626A 600A C627A 2525B.

2.02 SCHEDULED HARDWARE

A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following:

1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified under the Article "Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements.

2.03 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect.

1. Manufacturers name will not be permitted on cylinders or keys.

B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by


applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified.

C. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for finish designations indicated.

D. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.

E. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish.

2.04 HINGES AND SPRING HINGES

A. Hinges shall be 5-knuckle, exposed bearings and shall be certified to exceed two million, five hundred thousand, 2,500,000, full load-operating cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory. Templates: Except for hinges to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames provide only template-produced units.

B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements:

1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes.

2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws.

3. For fire-rated wood doors install #12 x 1-1/4-inch, threaded-to-the-head steel wood screws.

4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.

C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:

1. Out-Swing Doors with Locks: Nonremovable pins (NRP).

2. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins.

3. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves.

4. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges for door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height. Unless otherwise specified, hinge size for doors through 3’-0” shall be 4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches.

5. Hinges for doors over 3’-0” wide shall be four ball bearing, heavy weight, 0.190 gage inches, 5 inches x 4-1/2 inches.

a) Option: Doors over 3’-0” wide shall receive four (4) heavy weight, 0.190 gage inches, 4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches.


6. Fire-Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86 inches or less in height with same rule for additional hinges.

D. Spring Hinges: Furnish a minimum of two (2) spring hinges on labeled fire door applications. Spring hinges shall be listed by UL for fire rated openings up to and including 3-hour (A label) openings. Where wind conditions, excessive air pressure or adverse conditions prevent doors from closing, furnish one additional spring hinge.

E. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include:

1. Ives Hinges: 5BB1 5BB1HW.

2. McKinney Hinge: TA2714 T4A3786.

3. Stanley Hinge: FBB179 FBB168.

2.05 KEYING SYSTEMS

A. Meet with Architect and Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain keying instructions in writing. Interface new keying system with Owner’s existing Schlage keying system. Keying services shall be performed by lock manufacturer, where permanent records are maintained.

B. Furnish cylinders with temporary construction keying system during construction period. Owner shall void temporary construction keying system.

C. Keys and Key Blanks: Furnish of nickel silver to maintain security and safety of keying system and accuracy in keys and long cylinder wear.

1. Key blanks shall be available only from factory-direct sources, not available from after-market key blank manufacturers.

2. All keys shall be “embossed “Do Not Duplicate”. Keys and cylinders shall be stamped with the applicable key mark for identification. Stamp all keys in sequence. Visual stamped key control on keys, indelible marking on cylinder bodies.

3. Architect and Owner shall approve stampings and markings prior to ordering of locksets and cylinders; furnish Owner’s written approval of the system.

4. For estimate use factory GGMK charges.

D. Do not package permanent keys with locks. Package key separately from locksets and cores. Deliver all keys, key blanks and other security keys direct to Owner from lock manufacturer by secure courier, return receipt requested.

1. Transmit bitting list direct from lock manufacturer to Executive Director Construction Management in a sealed envelope, via secure carrier, marked “Alameda High School Bitting List.”

E. Failure to properly comply with these requirements may be cause to require replacement of all or any part of the keying system, cores, cylinders and keys involved as deemed necessary at no additional cost to the Owner.

F. Key Quantity: Furnish keys in the following quantities:


1. 6 each Temporary construction keys to General Contractor.

2. 6 each Master Keys for each master used, to Owner.

3. 6 each Change keys per cylinder to Owner.

4. 50 each Key blanks each type used to Owner.

G. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include:

1. Schlage Lock: Existing E Keyway.

2.06 LOCKSETS AND LATCHSETS

A. Locksets and latchsets shall be non-handed, heavy-duty cylindrical type, with 2-3/4 inch backset or greater, as specified, with ½ inch throw latchbolt. Manufacturer lock chassis from cold rolled steel, with locking spindles of deep drawn cold rolled steel. Spindles to resist deforming under sever torque.

B. Lever trim shall be designed to increase resistance against vandalism and forced entry by over torquing of lock chassis. Disablement of secured levers shall not permit latchbolt retraction from secure side while allowing emergency egress.

C. Furnish units with concealed through-bolts and threaded chassis hubs to prevent lever torque from rotating lock chassis and maintain correct alignment. Equip units with cast auxiliary spring cages with studs to prevent rotation attached directly to the lock chassis to assist in support of levers. Spring cage units shall contain coil compression springs to maintain life safety and provide extended service.

D. Provide manufacturer’s standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings.

E. Interface Owner’s existing keying system with specified locksets. Furnish complete and fully operational locksets and cylinders.

F. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include:

1. Schlage Lock: ND Vandlgard Series, Rhodes Lever Design.

2.07 EXIT DEVICES AND MULLIONS

A. Provide exit devices with specified functions, which can accept specified cylinders. Exit devices shall have ribbed interior body to discourage vandalism and graffiti. Releasable with 15 lb. maximum pressure under 250-lb. load to the door. Where specified furnish special cylinder (SD) dogging to replace standard hex key dogging.

B. Equip devices with dead locking latchbolts. Furnish through bolted fasteners for all devices. Where required, provide projecting glass bead stop kits to provide clearance when used with projecting glass stops. Furnish glass bead stop kits at locations using both exit devices and electric strikes.


C. Lever handle trim shall have a mechanism to disengage lever from operating should excessive force be applied, and allow lever to be re-set to its operating position. Lever design to match lock manufacturer’s lever design. Provide keyed security removable mullions, which will accept security cylinders of specified cylinder manufacturer, to allow removal by use of the cylinder. Mullions to be furnished with a self-locking mechanism for re-installation without the use of the cylinder. Equip each mullion with mullion stabilizers to maintain integrity between door and mullion to prevent vandalism.

D. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include:

1. Von Duprin, Inc. 99 Series.

2.08 CLOSERS

A. Where manual closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically challenged, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. Except as specifically indicated, comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for size of door control units, depending upon size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use.

B. Closers shall be cast iron or aluminum construction with forged lever arms, independent adjusting valves for closing, latching and back check. Hydraulic regulation controlled by tamper-proof, non-critical screw valves. All closer adjustments shall be shielded by plastic cover plate after installation. Furnish extra duty arms, EDA, to protect against excessive force. Provide special templated arms to allow clearance and applications of overhead stops and holders.

C. Provide combination door closer and electromagnetic holder designed to hold door in open position. Under normal usage and to release and automatically close door under fire conditions. Incorporate an integral electromagnetic holder mechanism designed for use with UL listed fire detectors, provided with normally closed switching contacts. Provide integral smoke detector device in combination door closers and holders complying with UL 228.

D. Install closers to allow maximum degree of opening, position back check to activate well in advance of the stop position to cushion the opening swing and prevent door and frame damage. Install closers with through bolt mounting method on metal and wood doors.

1. Template and install door closers for maximum degree of door swing.

E. Openings requiring electrically controlled door holding magnets shall be equipped with units, which are fail-safe and hold until current is interrupted. Provide units with through bolt attachment for door-mounted armatures. Size the units for proper depth and projection to ensure clearance with adjacent hardware.

F. Operating Voltages: Coordinate operating power requirements with Fire/Life Safety control systems.

G. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include:

1. LCN: 4041-ST3596 EDA.

2.01 PROTECTIVE PLATES


A. Provide manufacturers standard exposed fasteners for door trim units, kick plates, edge trim, push/pull plates and similar units; either machine screws of self-tapping screws.

B. Fabricate protection plates, armor, kick or mop, not more than 2 inches less than door width on stop side and not more than 1 inch less than door width on pull side, and 1 inch less than the door width on double doors, by the height indicated. Size plates to provide clearance for bottom rail, grills, louvers and door lites.

1. Protective plates shall be nominal 12 inches in height.

2. Metal Plates: Stainless steel plates 0.050, US 18 Ga.

C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include:

1. Ives 8400, (0.050 inches).

2. Rockwood K1050, 18 gage, (0.050 inches).

3. Triangle Brass KOO50, 18 gage, (0.050 inches).

2.02 DOOR STOPS

A. Furnish heavy duty wrought stainless steel base material, concave or convex wall stops, coincide with lock function, wherever door strikes wall unless otherwise noted in hardware sets, provide wall type with appropriate fasteners. Where wall type cannot be used, provide floor type. If neither can be used, provide overhead type.

1. Floor Stops: (Place at maximum swing and out of traffic flow, avoid trip hazards).

B. Provide gray resilient rubber bumpers.

C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include:

1. Ives WS406 FS495 470 436/438.

2. Rockwood 407/408 494 455 440/441.

3. Triangle Brass W1274CCS 1254 1245 1210/1212.

2.03 THRESHOLDS, WEATHERSTRIPPING AND SEALS

A. Provide continuous seal at jambs and heads and at door bottom. Where specified, provide threshold type with silicone gasket. Smoke, or sound seals shall be rated in accordance with surrounding wall rating respective to sound or fire rating or as required by code. Unless otherwise indicated, provide metal threshold units of type, size and profile as shown or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior and interior applications.

B. Extruded aluminum with color anodized finish as selected by Architect from manufacturers standard color range; 0.062-inch minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.


C. Fire-rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL10C/UBC-7-2 compliant. Coordinate with selected door manufacturers and selected frame manufacturer’s requirements.

D. Fire-rated Doors, Intumescent Seals: furnish fire-labeled opening assembly complete and in full compliance with UL10C/UBC-7-2. Furnished by selected door manufacturer, these seals vary in requirement by door type and door manufacture.

1. Adhesive applied intumescent strips are not acceptable, use concealed-in-door-edge type or kerfed-in-frame type. Careful coordination required.

E. Fasteners: Generally, exposed screws to be Phillips or Robertson drive. Flat head sleeve anchors (FHSL) may be slotted drive. Sheet metal and wood screws: full-thread. Sleeve nuts: full length to prevent door compression.

F. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include:

1. National Guard 8426 C627A 5050B 5100.

2. Pemko 253 x 3AFG 3452CNB S88D N/A.

2.04 HARDWARE FINISHES

A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and locksets (or push-pull units if no latch or locksets).

B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.

C. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.

D. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry-recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted.

1. Satin Chrome Plated; Clear Powder Coated: US26D/ANSI 626, ANSI 652,

2. Brushed Stainless Steel; No Coating: US32D/ANSI 630.

3. Powder Coated Aluminum finish: ANSI 689.

4. Thresholds and Weatherseal: Thresholds, mill aluminum finish. Weatherseal, clear anodized aluminum finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to which hardware assemblies attach to hollow metal frames, doors and walls, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, blocking and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.02 REMOVAL AND SALVAGE OF EXISTING HARDWARE

A. Contractor shall salvage all existing hardware that will not be reused. Salvaged hardware shall be boxed and delivered to the school custodian at each school location.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Builder’s Hardware Installation:

B. Preinstallation conference shall be conducted prior to installation of hardware at Project site. Meet with the, Owner, Contractor, installer, and manufacturers’ representatives. A separate preinstallation conference shall be conducted prior to the installation of electronic security hardware with the electrical contractor Review catalogs, brochures, templates, installation instructions, and the approved hardware schedule. Survey installation procedures and workmanship, with special emphasis on unusual conditions, as to ensure correct technique of installation, and coordination with other work. Notify participants at least ten, 10 working days before conference.

1. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.

a) Install all screws with Loctite, 242, blue.

C. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect.

1. Exit device touch bar height, center line to finished floor: 40" inches at center.

a) Center exit devices on mid-rail of doors.

2. Lever locksets height to, centerline to finished floor: 38" inches at center.

3. Americans with Disabilities Act, (ADA), of 1990 Guidelines.

D. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

1. Patch and fill wood frames and doors with solid wood stock or dowel material before cutting for new hardware. Do not reuse existing screw holes fill and re-pilot.

2. Gaskets: install jamb-applied gaskets before closers, overhead stops, rim strikes, etc. Install sweeps across bottoms of doors before astragals, cope sweeps around bottom pivots, trim astragals to tops of sweeps.

F. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."


G. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated.

H. Drill pilot holes for fasteners in wood doors and/or frames.

I. Lubricate and adjust existing hardware scheduled to remain. Carefully remove and give to Owner items not scheduled for reuse.

J. All screws shall have Loctite applied to them.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Architectural Hardware Consultant: Architect will engage a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

B. Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.

3.05 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING

A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.

C. Manufacturer’s representatives shall Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. Allow one-eight-hour training classes for mechanical locksets, exit devices and door closer.

3.06 EXTRA STOCK

A. Contractor shall provide the district with eight (8) extra locksets.

3.07 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule, and in the following schedule of hardware sets.

B. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable. Notify the Architect of omissions or discrepancies prior to bid date for clarifications or instructions. Adjustments to the Contract Sum will not be allowed for omissions not clarified prior to bid opening.

HW SET: 1

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4511

689 LCN

HW SET: 2

1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 36" X 2" LDW 630 IVE


HW SET: 3

3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT-2 689 VON 1 EA EU CLASSROOM LOCK CLN70PEL/EU (CLASSROOM FAIL

SAFE/FAIL SECURE) 626 SCH

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 EDA ST3596 SNB 689 LCN 1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 36" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP & HOLDER WS45 (MOUNT AT HEAD X THRU-BOLT

MOUNTED) 626 IVE

1 SET SEALS 5050B BRN NGP 1 EA DOOR SWEEP C627A CL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 814 MS/LA (WIDTH OF OPENING X DEPTH

OF JAMB) AL NGP

1 EA LOCK GUARD LG12 630 IVE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY REUSE EXISTING SENTROL POWER

SUPPLY B/O

1 EA CARD ACCESS CARD ACCESS SYSTEM B/O 1 EA REQUEST TO EXIT REUSE EXISTING B/O 1 EA ELECTRICAL CONNECT JOB SITE SUPERVISION (ELECTRICAL

CONNECTIONS) B/O

1 SET RISER/WIRING DIAGRAM

RISER & WIRING DIAGRAMS BY SECURITY

B/O

1) 5-1/2-INCHES REQUIRED BETWEEN BOTH DOOR FACES. HW SET: 4

1) 5-1/2-INCHES REQUIRED BETWEEN BOTH DOOR FACES.

3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 630 IVE 1 1

EA EA

POWER TRANSFER EU CLASSROOM LOCK

EPT-2 CLN70PEL/EU (CLASSROOM FAIL SAFE/FAIL SECURE)

689 626

VON SCH

1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4041 (REGULAR ARM MOUNTED) ST3596 TBWMS

689 LCN

1 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 36" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP & HOLDER WS45 (MOUNT AT HEAD X THRU-BOLT

MOUNTED) 626 IVE

1 SET SEALS 5050B BRN NGP 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 600A CL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD SHARED THRESHOLD (PROVIDE

ADDED WIDTH TO COVER BOTH DOORS) AL NGP

1 1

EA EA

CARD ACCESS REQUEST TO EXIT

CARD ACCESS SYSTEM REUSE EXISTING

B/O B/O

1 EA ELECTRICAL CONNECT JOB SITE SUPERVISION (ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS)

B/O


RISER & WIRING DIAGRAMS BY SECURITY

B/O


HW SET: 5

6 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE 2 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT-2 689 VON 2 EA SURFACE BOLT SB453 12" TB 652 IVE 1 EA EU CLASSROOM

LOCK CLN70PEL/EU (CLASSROOM FAIL SAFE/FAIL SECURE)

626 SCH

2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP HEDA TBWMS 689 LCN 2 EA ARMOR PLATE 8400 36" X 1" LDW B4E 630 IVE 2 EA DOOR STOP FS18S (SET IN CONSTRUCTION

ADHESIVE) BLK IVE

1 SET SEALS A626A CL NGP 1 EA ASTRAGAL 139SS 84" SNB X 2525B

MOUNT ON PULL SIDE OF ACTIVE LEAF. 630 NGP

2 EA DOOR SWEEP C627A CL NGP 1 EA THRESHOLD 8426 MS/LA AL NGP 1 EA CARD READER REUSE EXISTING CARD READER B/O 1 EA MOTION SENSOR REUSE EXISTING BOSH DS150I B/O 2 EA DOOR POSITION

SWITCH REUSE EXISTING SENTROL DPIS B/O

1 EA POWER SUPPLY REUSE EXISTING SENTROL POWER SUPPLY

B/O

OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION 1) DOOR NORMALLY CLOSED AND LOCKED AT ALL TIMES. 2) AUTHORIZED CARD MOMENTARILY ENABLES ELECTRIC LOCK TO UNLOCK OUTSIDE LEVER ALLOWING ENTRY. 3) DOOR POSITION SWITCH MONITORS DOOR STATUS. 4) REQUEST TO EXIT DISABLES CARD ACCESS ALARM UPON ACTIVATION. 5) EMERGENCY KEY OVERRIDE; UNIMPEDED EXIT. 6) HOLD OPEN DOOR CLOSER FOR DELIVERIES. HW SET: 6

1 EA POWER SUPPLY REUSE EXISTING POWER SUPPLY B/O 1 1

EA EA

CARD ACCESS REQUEST TO EXIT

CARD ACCESS SYSTEM REUSE EXISTING

B/O B/O


RISER & WIRING DIAGRAMS BY SECURITY B/O

HW SET: 7

1 SET SEALS 5050B BRN NGP 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 600A CL NGP

END OF SECTION

1 1

EA EA

POWER TRANSFER EU CLASSROOM LOCK

EPT-2 CLN70PEL/EU (CLASSROOM FAIL SAFE/FAIL SECURE)

689 626

VON SCH

08 81 00 - 1 Glazing

SECTION 08 81 00 GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Glass and Glazing For: a. Steel Doors and Frames: Section 08 11 00

1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: See Section 01 42 19. Comply with following:

1. FGMA Glazing Manual, latest edition 2. FGMA Glazing Sealant Systems Manual, latest edition 3. Insulating Glass: IGCC certified

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit 12-inch by 12-inch samples of each type of glass indicated in accordance with

Section 01 33 00. Provide additional cut glass sizes as requested by Architect. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with:

1. Fire Glass: UL approved. 2. Safety Glass and Glazing: State Statutes, IBC and ANSI Z97.1.

B. Single-Source Fabrication Responsibility: Comply with:

1. All glass fabricated for each type shall be supplied by a single fabricator. Glass fabricator to have a minimum of ten years experience with fabrication of similar units and meet ANSI/ISO/ASQC ( American Society for Quality Control) 9001-2000.

C. Warranty: Fabricator provide in writing in accordance with Section 01 70 00. Coating integrity on

all units: 10 years. A. Laminated unit integrity: 5 years.

B. Seal integrity on all insulated units: 10 years. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01 60 00.

1. Delivery: Schedule deliver to coincide with glazing schedules so minimum handling of crates is required. Do not open crates except as required for inspection for shipping damage.

2. Storage: Store cases according to printed instructions on case, in areas least subject to traffic or falling objects. Keep storage area clean and dry.

3. Handling: Unpack cases following printed instructions on case. Stack individual windows on edge leaned slightly against upright support with separators between each.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Field measure openings before ordering all glass products. Be responsible

for proper fit of field measured products.

08 81 00 - 2 Glazing

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GLASS A. Labels: Each individual piece of glass shall bear a label designating type, thickness and quality.

Do not remove labels until reviewed by Architect. B. Glass Types: Provide glass of following types as indicated: TYPE DESCRIPTION C ¼” clear tempered glass. 2.02 GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glazing Gaskets: Aluminum framing system manufacturer's standard EPDM or neoprene

extrusions. B. Setting Blocks, Shims and Glazing Clips: Size and type as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Preshimmed Glazing Tape: 1. Acceptable Products:

a. Bostik Chem-Tape 60 b. Pecora Shim-Seal Tape c. Tremco Preshimmed 440 Tape d. “District Approved” Substitute

2. Description: Preformed, adhesive, elastomeric butyl/polyisobutylene glazing tape with continuous built-in EPDM shim, designed for pressure sealing of glazing units in framing system.

3. Sealant Compatibility: Provide tape compatible with silicone glazing sealant and curtainwall or window wall perimeter sealants.

D. Spacers: Neoprene, 40-50 durometer hardness, compatible with sealants used. E. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant gasket manufacturer. F. Silicone Glazing Compound: GE Siliglaze N or “District Approved” substitute in accordance with

Section 01 60 00. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verification of Conditions: Comply with Section 01 60 00.

1. Layout: Verify layout of work before beginning installation. 2. Existing Conditions: Before glazing, verify that frames are plumb and square with metal

stops set for proper glass-to-stop face clearance. 3. Notification: Notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory conditions in writing with copy to

Architect. B. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer.

08 81 00 - 3 Glazing

3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Completely cover glass during spray painting, texturing or other construction

operations that might cause damage to glass. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Stops:

1. Hold glass with metal stops as detailed. a. Stops: Furnished under other sections.

2. Carefully remove any stop already in place as necessary to permit the glazing. 3. Handle stops carefully and install to avoid damage.

B. Glazing In All Metal Frames (Exterior and Interior): The opening to be glazed must first be taped

to prevent the glass from touching the metal in any direction. Center glass in glazing rabbet to maintain recommended clearances at perimeter on all four sides, inside and out. Rest glass panes on setting blocks as recommended by the glass manufacturer.

Install shims or use shim tape as recommended to maintain clearance between stops and face of

glass. Install glazing tape, then stop-in with metal stops as specified above. Cover top of tape with sealant on exterior side of exterior windows. Maintain a minimum face clearance of 1/8" between all glass faces and metal stops as called for by Flat Glass Marketing Association Standards.

Cut glass with smooth, straight edges of full size required by the openings. Edge clearances shall

comply with Flat Glass Marketing Association Standards. Leave sealant smooth and clean. Remove sealant from adjoining surfaces without damaging the finish.

C. Glazing in Aluminum Windows and Doors: Install glass on setting blocks as recommended by the

frame manufacturer. Dry glaze using glass retainers providing resilient clamping grip on glass or glaze with elastic glazing compound as required.

D. Allowable Tolerances: Maintain glazing tolerances between glass and frame or stops as

recommended by the FGMA. 1. 1/4" Thickness Glass: Maintain 1/8" clearance between glass face and metal stops.

3.04 CLEANING A. Cleaning: Leave glass in job clean condition with all glazing compound and putty carefully

removed from glass and adjoining surfaces. 1. Final Cleaning of Glass: Under Section 01 74 00.

B. Breakage: Unless responsibility can be assessed to another contractor, be responsible for glass

broken during shipment, storage and installation.

END OF SECTION

09 91 00 - 1 Painting

SECTION 09 91 00 PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Paint all exterior surfaces not specifically excluded. 2. Paint or natural finish all interior surfaces not specifically excluded. 4. Anti-graffiti finish at interior ground-face CMU walls. 5. Special coating on exterior architectural aluminum panels.

B. Exclusions: In addition to material obviously not requiring paint such as glass, floor, tile, etc. Do not

paint or finish: 1. Surfaces indicated by the finish schedule to remain unfinished. 2. Factory finished surfaces indicated to be factory finished.

C. Related Sections:

1. Project Sign: Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 2. Piping Identification: Division 22 & 23 - Mechanical.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Finish Schedule: The architect has provided finish drawings which contain color selections of most

materials. If materials of other manufacturers are used, colors shall match those selected. Additionally the architect will provide color selections of items not selected within the finish drawings from color systems of recognized paint companies.

B. Paint, Finish and Stain Samples: Prepare and submit 12" x 12" paint and stain samples in

accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit sample of interior painted ”Orange-peel” finish to be applied on painted drywall surfaces for review. Remake samples until accepted.

C. Material List: Immediately after award of the contract submit letter listing brand and quality of each

material for use on project. Materials list shall be accepted by the Architect before ordering materials.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with Section 01 60 00. B. Delivery: Deliver materials required for painting in unbroken packages bearing the brand and name

of manufacturer. Order materials sufficiently in advance to be on the job when needed and deliver at the building in sufficient quantities so the work will not be delayed. No claim by the Contractor concerning unsuitability of any material specified or his inability to produce first-class work with the same, will be entertained unless such claim is made, in writing, with the material list submitted.

C. Storage and Mixing: Assign room or space in which to mix or store material.

1. Provide galvanized mixing pans for mixing of paint. Mix paint only in these pans. Do not bring empty containers bearing name or brand of any manufacturer upon premises for mixing of paint unless labels are canceled and containers are closely marked as to contents.

09 91 00 - 2 Painting

D. Inspection: The paint storage area shall be open for periodic inspection by the Architect to insure only approved materials are being used.

1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions:

1. Spaces must be clean before finishing is started. Do not finish in rooms or spaces where rubbish has accumulated or while rubbish is being removed. Finishing not allowed in dusty rooms.

2. Do not remove rubbish while finish is fresh. 3. Surfaces: Dry and clean.

B. Environmental Requirements: Do not finish outside surfaces in extreme cold, frosty, foggy, or damp

weather. In winter weather, finish only when the temperature is 50 degrees F or over and surface is absolutely dry. Exterior painting not allowed while dust is blowing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Best quality materials as manufactured by any of the following

manufacturers will be acceptable: 1. For Brush, Roller, or Spray Work at both exterior and interior locations:

a. Pittsburgh b. ICI c. Sherwin-Williams d. Benjamin Moore e. Pratt & Lambert f. Kelley-Moore g. KWAL h. “District Approved” Substitute in accordance with Section 01600.

2. Epoxy Coating: Pittsburgh, Sherwin-Williams or “District Approved” substitute. 3. Stain and Varnish: Pratt & Lambert, Inc. 4. Interior anti-graffiti coating: Conformal Clear by Chemprobe Technologies. 5. Exterior Aluminum Wall Panels Coating: TNEMEC, Fluoropolymer finish system.

B. Quality: All products not specified by name shall be "best grade" or "first line" products of acceptable

manufacturers. See Part 3 - Execution for materials required for this project. Where possible, provide materials of single manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Sample Walls and Materials: Contractor shall provide a 10’x10’ minimum wall sample for each color

selected for review. Do not order any material or begin installation until the correct matching colors and sheen have been approved by the Architect.

B. Verification of Conditions: Examine surfaces scheduled to receive paint and finishes for conditions

that will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work and which cannot be put into an acceptable condition through preparatory work as included under Preparation. Report unsatisfactory conditions to the General Contractor in writing with copy to the Architect.

C. Acceptance: Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions by installer.

09 91 00 - 3 Painting

3.02 PREPARATION A. General:

1. Sand finishes on wood and metal surfaces between coats to assure smoothness and adhesion of subsequent coats. Use extra fine sandpaper to avoid cutting the edges when sanding. Apply putty or spackling compound after surfaces are primed and primer is dry. Bring material flush with adjoining surfaces.

2. Surfaces: Perfectly dry, clean and smooth before starting work. Fill cracks, holes or checks full and make smooth before finish is applied to surfaces. Fill any cracks, etc. which occur after walls are sized.

B. Interior Wood Surfaces to be Painted: Touch-up sap and knots with an accepted sealer. Fill voids

with wood putty after primer is dry. C. Ferrous Metals: Remove foreign material from unprimed metal with wire brush and dust clean. D. Shop Primed Metals: Touch-up shop primed metals with primer similar to existing. Sand shop

primer on hollow metal work immediately before painting to remove grease and dirt film from surfaces.

E. Zinc Coated Metals (Galvanized Surfaces): Wash with mineral spirits and prime as specified. F. Interior Wood to be Clear Finished: Sand as required. Fill voids and nail holes after first coat is dry

using filler compatible with finish system and matching color. G. Protection: Furnish and lay drop cloths or mask off areas where finishing is being done to protect

floors and other work from damage during execution of work. Where it becomes necessary to remove temporary coverings placed by others, replace same in proper manner. Remove oily rags and waste from building every night. Do not allow to accumulate.

H. Damage to Work of Others: Be responsible for any damage done to work of other trades, repairing

same to satisfaction of Architect. Replace any materials damaged to such an extent that they cannot be restored to their original condition.

3.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Surfaces: If surfaces are not in proper shape for painting, repair, rebuild or refinish before

proceeding with the work. Be responsible for any poor work caused by improper surfaces. Application of first coat does not relieve responsibility for base. Do not apply any coats on either damp or wet surfaces and in no case until the preceding coat is dry and hard.

B. Application: Spread materials evenly without runs or sagging of materials and thoroughly brush out.

Sand work between coats. C. Trim: Finish all surfaces and edges of wood trim. D. Colors: Finish coat shall be in color as selected by Architect. Tint primers to match finish coat. E. Roller Application: Where paint or enamel is rolled on, use fine nap roller so a nearly flat or fine

orange peel texture is obtained. 3.04 COATING SYSTEM - INTERIOR

09 91 00 - 4 Painting

NOTE: ALL PAINT SHALL BE THE LOWEST LUSTER POSSIBLE CONSISTANT WITH

CLEANABILITY AND REGULAR MAINTENANCE. Minimum of the following: Sand and prime existing surfaces prior to re-coating . Extra coats of paint

may be required to obtain a completely opaque surface with no flashing or read thru from any substrate.

A. Woodwork - Stained: First Coat P&L Tonetic Wood Stain Second Coat P&L Pale Trim Varnish, Gloss Third Coat P&L Pale Trim Varnish, Dull Sand with No. 00 sandpaper between coats. B. Woodwork - Painted: First Coat Suitable Primer Second Coat Enamel Undercoat Third Coat Semi-Gloss Enamel C. Ferrous, Zinc Coated or Factory-Primed Metals - Painted: First Coat Suitable Primer or Factory Prime Coat Second Coat Enamel Undercoat Third Coat Semi-Gloss Enamel D. Hollow Metal Frames and Doors - Painted: First Coat Factory Prime Coat (Sanded) Second Coat Alkyd Enamel Undercoat Third Coat Semi-Gloss Enamel E. Block - Painted: First Coat Block Filler Second Coat Latex Enamel, Eggshell Third Coat Latex Enamel, Eggshell F. Drywall - Painted: First Coat Suitable Primer Second Coat Latex Enamel, Eggshell Third Coat Latex Enamel, Eggshell G. Concrete - Painted: First Coat Suitable Primer Second Coat Latex Enamel, Eggshell Third Coat Latex Enamel, Eggshell H. Epoxy: First Coat Block Filler or Suitable Primer Second Coat Pittsburgh 16 Line Pitt-Glaze, Eggshell Third Coat Pittsburgh 16 Line Pitt-Glaze, Eggshell

09 91 00 - 5 Painting

3.05 COATING SYSTEM - EXTERIOR Minimum of the Following: A. Metal Doors, Frames and Ferrous Metals First Coat 100% Acrylic Primer Second Coat Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel Third Coat Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel B. Zinc Coated Metal (Galvanized): First Coat Galvanized Iron Primer Second Coat Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel, Exterior Third Coat Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel, Exterior C. Block or Concrete - Painted: First Coat Acrylic Block Filler Second Coat Acrylic Satin Third Coat Acrylic Satin 3.06 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS A. Mechanical Piping and Ductwork: Wherever insulated pipe or ductwork occurs in rooms where walls

are finished, cover canvas jacket with one coat sealer and two coats flat wall paint. Wherever uninsulated piping or ductwork occurs in rooms where walls are finished or elsewhere as called for, finish pipes as called for under ferrous, zinc coated or factory primed metals. See Division 22 and 23 for identification markings.

B. Prime Coated Hardware: Paint new removable mullions and prime coated hardware as specified

under ferrous, zinc coated or factory primed metal - painted. C. Metal Glass Stops (in wood doors): Finish as specified for ferrous metals. 3.07 CLEAN UP A. Final Clean Up: At the completion of work, remove all surplus materials, staging, rubbish; clean off

all paint, varnish, stains from floors, glass, walls, hardware; and leave the premises in clean condition.

3.08 EXTRA STOCK A. Extra Paint: At the completion of painting, deliver to the Owner one full gallon of each paint color and

type used along with the color number or formula for each type. Epoxy and high performance coatings are not included.

END OF SECTION

28 00 05E – 1 Common Work Results for Electronic Life Safety and Security

SECTION 28 05 00E COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRONIC LIFE SAFETY AND SECURITY

(EXISTING SYSTEMS)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Cable Material Requirements.

B. Cable Installation Requirements.

1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General and Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 – General Requirements shall apply to work of this Section.

B. Prior to the bid, all exceptions taken to these Specifications, any variances to the contract drawing design, and any non-conformance to the operating capabilities called for in this specification, shall be listed in writing and forwarded with the submission of the bid. Any such exception, variance, or non-conformance, which was not listed at the time of bid, and is identified in the submittal, shall be grounds for immediate disapproval without comment.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 07: Firestopping.

B. Division 26: Common Work Results for Electrical Systems.

C. Division 26: Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

D. Division 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

E. Division 26: Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

F. Division 26: Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.

G. Division 26: Identification for Electrical Systems.

H. Division 27: Communications.

I. Division 28: Access Control Security System.

J. Division 28: Video Surveillance Security Systems.

K. Division 28: Fire Alarm and Detection System. (New and Existing)

L. Division 28: Security Detection and Alarm Systems (New and Existing)

M. Data, Communication and Alarm Diagram (DCAD)

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Reference Division 01 – Submittal Procedures


1. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data sheets showing product appearance, electrical characteristics, and connection requirements.

2. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use, as stipulated by the product-testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and start-up or products.

3. Exceptions: Provide a details listing of any and all exceptions, variances, and non-conformances to the specifications and contract design drawings. Failure to disclose any such items shall be grounds for immediate disapproval of submittals without comment.

4. Samples: Provide samples of the following items. a. Provide a minimum of two (2) samples of all cable to be installed on the projects.

Cable samples shall be of sufficient length to identify cable marking (striping) and cable listing identification.

b. Provide a minimum of two (2) samples of all cable supporting devices, metal bridle rings, metal mounting brackets, plastic plenum rated wire bushings, and other applicable cable installation equipment to be utilized on the project.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with a

minimum three (3) years experience, and with service facilities within fifty (50) miles of the project.

B. Installer: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with a minimum three (3) years documented experience. The installer shall employ Factory Certified technicians or engineers to install products specified in this Section. The installer shall employ NICET Level 2 technicians or engineers to install the fire alarm products specified in this section. All programming of the District Access Control system shall be done by HSS.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCESS CONTROL/SECURITY AND SAFETY ALARM SYSTEM WIRE AND CABLE

A. Cable for Class 1 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 600 volts insulation rated 75 degrees C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a non-metallic jacket, UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums.

B. Cable for Class 2 or Class 3 Remote Control and Signal Circuits: Copper conductor, 300 volts insulation rated 75 degrees C, individual conductors twisted together, shielded, and covered with a non-metallic jacket, UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums.

C. Miscellaneous Access Control/System Circuits: Power limited fire protective signaling cable for fire and smoke characteristics, copper conductor, 300 volts insulation rated 105 degrees C, UL listed for use in air handling ducts, hollow spaces used as ducts, and plenums.

D. Use #16 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm and device initiating loop (SLC) circuits and panel interconnections. Use #14 AWG minimum size conductors for fire alarm notification appliance (NAC) circuits and power circuits. Follow manufacturer’s recommended instructions for system wiring.

E. Use #18/4 AWG minimum size stranded conductors for security device initiating loop circuits.

F. Provide wet environment exterior rated cable for underground raceway or exterior cable applications.


G. Install all remote control and signal cables in raceways, or supported every 4 to 6 feet on bridal rings.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Plenum rated cable 1. Cable routing shall be perpendicular to or parallel to structural building members, and

shall utilize a metal bridal ring type support system attached to structural building members only.

2. Mounting cable to other building systems (fire protection, electrical conduit, mechanical ductwork, etc.), or running cable in any fashion other than described, is strictly forbidden.

3. Insure minimum 12 inch separation between all other systems support paths. Allow for more distance as required by system manufacturer.

C. Do not exceed 40% fill rate in raceways and back boxes.

1. For retrofit applications, conduit and box fill shall be assessed and approved by the Engineer and District.

D. Minimum size for back boxes shall be 4” x 4” x 2-1/8”.

E. The use of extension rings on new or retrofit construction shall be approved on a “case-by-case basis” by the Engineer and District.

F. Junction boxes for any new or retrofit construction, that have more than eight (8) wire splice connections, shall have mounted terminal blocks, in lieu of wire nuts.

G. Provide Wiremold© or Plastic surface raceway in all areas that are exposed to the Public. Paint to match existing wall or ceiling finish, unless approved by the Engineer and District. Paint to match existing wall or ceiling finish, unless approved by the Engineer or District.

H. Support all boxes by All-thread or other District approved box support device; or bolt directly to building structural members. Do not support boxes to ceiling tie-wires.

I. Provide marking paint on support hardware. Red for Fire Alarm, Green for Security and Blue for Video Surveillance systems. Do not allow paint to contaminate any wire.

J. Mount end-of-line device in box with last device.

K. Mount outlet box for electric door holder to withstand 80 pounds pulling force. Refer to Division 9 for additional box support requirements.

L. Division 28 contractor shall make conduit and wiring connections to door release devices, sprinkler flow switches, sprinkler valve tamper switches, duct smoke detectors, smoke/fire dampers, HVAC units, and other applicable devices, furnished under other Sections.

M. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 72.

N. Automatic Duct Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA 90A.


3.02 OPEN (Plenum) CABLE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Open cabling shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, and shall be run perpendicular or parallel to building structural members. Diagonal routing of cable shall not be considered acceptable and shall cause to be removed and reinstalled.

B. Open cabling shall be routed away from other building cabling and equipment, and shall be routed to and from the device in a vertical or horizontal manner. Maintain cabling at the same level where possible, Cabling that is not dropped vertically to the device or routed horizontally straight to the device shall not be considered acceptable. Cabling that is routed through, over, under or around other equipment, when a straight horizontal or vertical path is available shall not be considered acceptable and shall cause the cable to be removed and be reinstalled.

C. Open cabling shall be supported at a minimum of every 4 to 6 feet to building structural members utilizing metal bridle rings. Cabling that is secured to sprinkler piping, HVAC ductwork, electrical conduit or other non-structural building member shall not be acceptable and shall cause the cable to be re-installed and re-supported in a proper manner.

D. Conduits and device back boxes shall have appropriate plastic plenum rated strain relief wire bushings where open cable routing occurs. Do not use Romex type connectors.

E. Conduits shall be utilized for all separation (wall, ceiling, fire separation barrier, etc.) penetrations.

F. EMT conduit shall be utilized in all wall cavities. Provide appropriate plastic plenum rated wire bushing where open cable routing occurs. Do not use Romex connectors.

G. Appropriate fire caulking or sealant shall be utilized where open cabling penetrations through fire separation barriers or building separation walls occur. Fire caulk all conduit ends where conduit sleeves penetrate fire barrier separations, after cable has been installed. Reference 07 84 00 – Firestopping.

3.03 LABELING

A. Label each initiating device with device ID address (L1-D1 format), and control module or monitor module with device ID address and circuit function (L1-M1, Strobes format). Use Kroy lettering machine with ¼-inch minimum black lettering on clear background, unless alternate labeling approved by the District.

B. Label each notification appliance with notification appliance (NAC) circuit number and device number in circuit (NAC 1:1-1, NAC 1:1-2, etc.). Label notification appliance (NAC) circuit and or line (EOL) device location on the notification appliance where the EOL is located (NAC 1:1 EOL). Use Kroy lettering machine with ¼-ingch minimum black lettering on clear background, unless alternate labeling approved by the District.

C. Label each remote duct detector or beam detector test station with device ID address and associated HVAC unit or beam detector designated (L1-M1 RUT-1 format). Label location of the device associated with the test station, if the test station is not in the direst vicinity of the associated device (L1-M1 RUT-1 Classroom 201 format). Use Kroy lettering machine with ¼-inch minimum black lettering on clear background, unless alternate labeling approved by the District.

D. Label each concealed device location with device ID address and circuit function (L1-M1 Door Holder format) at the adjacent ceiling tile grid T-bar. Use plastic laminate with engraved ¼-inch red lettering on white background, unless alternate labeling approved by the District.


E. Label each security device with device ID address (ID # format), and motion detector, keypad, card reader, etc. with device ID address and circuit function with ¼-inch minimum black lettering on clear background, unless alternate labeling approved by the District.

3.04 ACCESS CONTROL/SECURITY WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE A. Provide access control system conductors with insulation color coded as

1. Power Branch Circuit Conductors a. Black, red, blue, white, green

2. Card Reader (In/Out) Circuit a. 6/ C #20 twisted pair with overall shield, stranded b. White jacket with green striping

3. Motion Detector Circuit a. 6/ C #22 twisted pair with overall shield, stranded b. White jacket with green striping

4. RS-485 Data Circuit a. 2-Pair #18 with overall shield, stranded b. White jacket with green striping

5. Ethernet TCP/IP network cable a. Shall be CAT-5e, maximum distance based on industry standards b. White jacket with green striping

6. Door Strike Circuit a. 4/C #18 twisted pair with overall shield, stranded b. White jacket with green striping

7. Request-to-Exit (RX) Motion Detector Circuit a. 6/C #22 twisted pair with overall shield, stranded b. White jacket with green striping

8. Door Position Switch Circuit a. 4/C #22 twisted pair with overall shield, stranded b. White jacket with green striping

9. Security Keypad Circuit a. 1-6/C #22 twisted pair with overall shield, stranded b. White jacket with green striping

10. Future Data Circuit (RX Motion Detector) a. Cat-5E cable b. White jacket with green striping c. Leave cable coiled in the accessible ceiling space above the RX motion detector.

3.05 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WIRE AND CABLE COLOR CODE

A. Provide safety alarm system conductors with insulation color codes as: 1. Device Signaling Loop Circuit: (SLC) #16/2 Solid, red no stripe Label “SLC” 2. Initiating Device Circuit (IDC): #16/2 Solid, Red w/ Black Stripe 3. 24 VDC Power Circuit; #14/2 Solid, Red with Purple Stripe 4. Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC): #14/2 Solid, Red w/Green Stripe 5. Miscellaneous Fire Circuit: #18/4 Solid, Red w/Yellow Stripe 6. DACT Transmitter Circuit: #22/10 Solid, Red w/White Stripe 7. Metasys (LAN) Interface Circuit: Belden 9575 #16/4 x 2, Red w/ Blue Stripe 8. Security Circuit: #18/4 Stranded, Red w/ Orange Stripe 9. Conductor sizing and numbers subject to equipment manufacturer recommendations.


A. Access Control/Security System 1. Test in accordance with District requirements 2. Provide forty-eight (48) hours prior notice to the Engineer and District personnel for rough


inspection, prior to installing ceiling tiles or drywall. 3. Provide seven (7) day prior notice to the Engineer and District personnel for scheduled

contractor pre-testing of the Security and Safety alarm system. 4. Provide two (2) detailed record of the pre-testing of the system; one for the District and

one for the facility’s Security System logbook. Pre-testing record must contain a minimum of the device ID, proper device description, proper functionality of the device (panel notification, door unlock, etc.), and date of the testing. Utilize the standard District form available on the District website, or provide Contractor equivalent form approved by the District in advance of the system pre-test.

5. Access Control/Security System Contractor shall sub-contract the Services of Hospital Shared Services (HSS) to provide the access control/security system equipment, panel and device terminations, and system programming.

B. Fire Alarm System 1. Test in accordance with NFPA 72, District, State, and Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)

fire department requirements. Use District Record of Completion and Pretesting forms included in section 283100.

2. Provide forty-eight (48) hours prior notice to the Engineer and District personnel for rough inspection, prior to installing ceiling tiles, devices or drywall.

3. Provide seven (7) day prior notice to the Engineer and District personnel for scheduled contractor pre-testing of the system.

4. Provide three (3) day prior notice to the Engineer and District personnel for the scheduled Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) testing of the system.

5. Provide three (3) original copies of the NFPA 72 - Certificate of Completion Form. a. One for the District, one for the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), and one for

the facility’s Fire Alarm System Logbook. b. Voltage and current values must be true measured values not estimates.

6. Provide two (2) detailed records of the pre-testing of the system. a. One for the District and one for the facility’s Fire Alarm System logbook. b. Pre-testing record must contain a minimum of the device ID, proper annunciator

description, proper functionality of the device (audible/visual signaling, shutdown, etc.), and date of the testing.

c. Utilize the standard District form available on the District website, or provide Contractor equivalent form approved by the District in advance of the system pre-test.

7. Fire and Security Alarm Contractor shall be responsible for coordination and employing the Controls Contractor to accomplish programming required between Fire and Security Alarm system and Metasys system as well as connection of all interface circuits.

3.07 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES

A. Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, and system testing.

B. Provide two (2) hard copies and two (2) electronic copies in CD ROM or flash drive format of the final system programming. One set to be delivered to the District Project Manager for the District Central Reporting System programming, and one set t be left at the facility.

END OF SECTION

28 13 00 - 1

Access Control Security System

SECTION 28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROL SECURITY SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General and Supplementary General Conditions, and Division 1 – General Requirements shall apply to work of this Section.

B. At the time of bid, all exceptions taken to these Specifications, any variances of the contract drawing design, and any non-conformance to the operating capabilities called for in this specification, shall be listed in writing and forwarded with submission for the bid. Any such exception, variance, or non-conformance, with was not listed at the tome of bid, and is identified in the submittal, shall be grounds for immediate disapproval without comment.

1.02 SCOPE

A. Scope of Work for the Electronic Security Contractor (SC) shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, wiring, supplies, materials, and programming, unless otherwise specified, necessary for the installation of a complete Access Control System (ACS) as required by the specifications and as shown on the drawings, subject to the terms and conditions of the contract. The Work shall also include the completion of those details of work not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the successful operation of the ACS System.

B. The ACS System shall consist of, but it not limited to, the following types of equipment.

1. System Workstation (Existing workstations provided by the District.) 2. Door Control Panel(s). 3. Ethernet Network Converter(s). 4. Centralized Electronic Lock Power Supply(ies). 5. Proximity Card Readers. 6. Electronic Door Locks. 7. System Cabling. 8. Door Contacts. 9. Request to Exit Devices. 10. Fire Alarm and Security Interfaces as required.

C. SC shall provide and install all conduit, standard back-boxes, and 110VAC power circuits as necessary. SC shall install and “local” (at door location) dedicated electronic lock power supplies, as required.

D. Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. The District Guideline “Data, Communication, and Alarm Diagram” shall also apply to this section.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 07: Firestopping.

B. Division 08: Door Hardware.

28 13 00 - 2


C. Division 26: Common Work Results for Electrical Systems.

D. Division 26: Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.

E. Division 26: Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

F. Division 26: Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

G. Division 26: Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.

H. Division 26: Identification for Electrical Systems.

I. Division 27: Communications.

J. Division 28: Common Work for Electric Safety and Security.

K. Division 28: Fire Alarm and Detection System.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. ACS: Access Control System

B. CCTV: Closed Circuit Television

C. LAN: Local Area Network

D. WAN: Wide Area Network

E. EC: Electrical Contractor

F. SC: Electronic Security Systems Contractor

G. CAD: Card Access Door

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Reference Division 01 – Submittal Procedures 1. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings of system wiring diagrams showing all equip-

ment, device placement, and wiring connection required. Drawings to include one0line riser diagrams, device ID numbers and zone schedules, operational matrix, and location of all end-of –line (EOL) devices. Each security device shall include device ID number.

2. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data sheets showing product appearance, electrical characteristics, and connection requirements.

3. Load Calculations: Provide load calculations for all system power supplies, and battery standby systems.

4. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use, as stipulated by the product-testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and start-up or products.

5. Exceptions: Provide a details listing of any and all exceptions, variances, and non-conformances to the specifications and contract design drawings. Failure to disclose any such items shall be grounds for immediate disapproval of submittals without comment.

6. Samples: Provide samples of various items.

28 13 00 - 3


a. Provide a minimum of two (2) samples of all security cable to be installed on the

projects. Cable samples shall be of sufficient length to identify cable marking (striping) and cable listing identification.

b. Provide a minimum of two (2) samples of all cable supporting devices, metal bridle rings, metal mounting brackets, plastic plenum rated wire brushings, and other applicable cable installation equipment to be utilized on the project.

1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Reference Division 01 – Closeout Procedures.

B. Record Drawings

1. Record “AS-Built” locations of all system components, card readers, security deices, and end-of-line devices. Include “as-built” conduit and wire counts.

2. As-Built Drawings shall consist of one (1) full size bond hard copy set, one half-size bond hard copy set, and one electronic AutoCAD© DWG copy on CD format of all sheets.

C. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals:

1. Operation Data: Provide operating instructions, detailed for the specific project. 2. Maintenance Data: Provide maintenance and repair procedures for each type of

equipment provided, as applicable. Include any specific requirements particular to the project.

3. Equipment Data: Provide manufacturer data sheets or catalog sheets for each type of equipment provided.

4. Spare Parts Data: Provide manufacture’s recommended spare parts list, including quantity, and any equipment replacement schedules, as applicable.

5. Supplier Data: Provide system manufacturer and local service organization information. Include contact, phone numbers, and addresses, as applicable.

6. Warranty Data: Provide system warranty information, including all material and /or labor items.

D. Warranty:

1. The manufacturer shall guarantee the system equipment for a minimum period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. Any additional warranty periods shall be listed in the Operation and Maintenance Data Manuals. Any defective equipment, material, or software shall be replaced as no cost to the Owner during this warranty period.

2. The Installing Contractor shall guarantee all wiring and raceways to be free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for a minimum period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system. Any defective material and-or labor shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.

E. Maintenance Service:

1. Furnish warranty service of the card access system for one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the system, as follows: a. Basic Services: Systematic visits, as required; at times coordinated with the

owner. In addition, respond to service calls within 24 hours of notification of system trouble. Adjust and replace defective parts and components with original manufacturer’s replacement parts, components, and supplies.

F. Provide extra materials, as follows:

28 13 00 - 4


1. Provide two (2) of each type of detector. 2. Provide two (2) of each type of door switch. 3. Provide one (1) of each type of card reader. 4. Provide one (1) of each type of request-to-exit (RX) motion detector. 5. Provide six (6) of each type of key. 6. Provide two (2) hard copies of all system programming (points list) software. 7. Provide two (2) electronic copies of all system programming (software); on CD ROM or

flash drive format. 8. Provide Contractor red-line construction drawing set, with mark-ups. 9. Provide one (1) full size bond hard copy set of As-Built record drawing set. 10. Provide one (1) half size bond hard copy set of As-Built record drawing set. 11. Provide one (1) electronic copy of As-Built record drawing sets; in Autocad dgw file format

on CD format. 12. Provide any special test equipment, filters, test leads, cords, etc. required to test the

system.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All equipment shall equal or exceed the minimum requirements of NEMA, ASME, ANSI and Underwriter’s Laboratories. An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

B. All material ad equipment furnished shall be new and unused and free from defects. Equipment shall be clean and free of damage or corrosion, and shall be of the best quality obtainable foe the purpose intended.

C. Where more than one of any specified item if equipment of material is required, such as items shall be the product of one manufacturer throughout the facility.

D. All materials used shall bear labels attesting to Underwriter’s Laboratory approval, provided a standard is established for the material in question.

E. All materials shall conform strictly to the standards and specifications set forth in this document. Unless otherwise specified, all products furnished shall be designed, built and installed in accordance with the latest and best practice of the electrical industry, and shall conform to the standards of the NEMA, ANSI, TIA / EIA, IEEE, and NEC, and this Specification wherever they apply.

F. Contractor personnel shall be qualified to perform the work and be knowledgeable on the following standards, skills, and activities, as applicable:

1. TIA / EIA 568B, 569B, 606A, and 607A Standards. 2. Testing conductors for electrical continuity. 3. Testing copper and fiber circuits for performance compliance. 4. Bonding and grounding where required. 5. Cable terminations for specified connectors and terminations for copper and fiber cable.

G. Contractor personnel will be required to provide and use the proper tools in the performance of each activity. The tools must be in good working order. The Owner reserves the right to review the tool lists and tool maintenance procedures of the Contractor.

H. Access Control / Security System Contractor shall sub-contract the Services Hospital Shared Services (HSS) to provide the access control panels, device terminations, and system programming.

28 13 00 - 5


1.08 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three (3) years experience, and with service facilities within fifty (50) miles of the project.

B. Project Engineer: Company shall employ an Engineer of Record with a registered P.E. in security system design, or a registered P.E. in a related engineering discipline, with a minimum of two (2) years experience in security system design, or a minimum of five (5) years of documented experience in security system design.

C. Installer: Company shall be a Factory Authorized Dealer in good standing with the manufacturer specializing in installing the products specified in this section with a minimum three (3) years documented experience in like sized projects.

1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures; maintain within temperature and humidity ranges required by manufacturer’s instruction.

B. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation.

C. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged, and are maintained under required conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, products of the following manufacturers shall be acceptable:

1. Base Bid: The Base Bid shall be based upon IDenticard Systems, Inc. “PremiSys

System” 2. Substitutions: No Substitutions allowed.

2.02 EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES

A. Access Control Global Applications: 1. The system shall use a server computer that communicates with a client computer or

computers. It shall be possible to install the system software so that one computer functions as server and client. All server and client computers shall be off-the-shelf IBM®-compatible personal computers. The operating system software for servers and client shall be Microsoft® Windows XP Professional with Windows Service Pack 1 or later. The system shall be of true multiuser design and capable of simultaneous operations from multiple client interfaces. A user logged onto any one client interface shall not affect the system control by users logged onto other client interfaces.

2. The System Server, is centrally located at the District’s Central Data Center in the Educational Services Building in Denver West. The Server is connected to the District’s WAN for communication to all access control devices located throughout the District.

28 13 00 - 6


3. Access control panels located in the school MDF rooms shall communicate with the Server database, as shall the remote workstations located in the school.

4. The access control system shall be a versatile, user friendly, enterprise type system, which both controls / monitors facility access as well as manages facility security parameters.

5. The access control system shall utilize an Ethernet topology, for communications over the District’s LAN / WAN.

6. The access control system shall be capable of interfacing with additional facility systems such as security surveillance system and fire alarm. a. System shall be capable of arming and disarming the Vista security surveillance

system using event function. (2 separate relay functions) b. System shall disarm designated Vista security partitions on Access Granted into

the associated partitioned zone. c. The system shall be capable of a master arm and disarm of the Vista security

surveillance system from the Card Access Control System. d. The system shall monitor the Vista Security arm status using a monitoring point. e. The system shall be capable of broadcasting the system status over the school

paging system. Message 1 – Security System Arming Warning form the Vista panel Message 2 – Security System Intrusion Alarm Warning from the Vista Panel Message 3 – Security System Lock-Down Warning from the PremiSys system

7. Equipment and Software shall be IDenticard, and shall utilize the PremiSys software platform.

B. Access Control System Management:

1. The software shall support a maximum of 254 channels per system and a maximum of 8 controllers per channel.

2. The system hardware shall support various communication methods for communication among host computers, controllers and I/O components. It shall be possible to use serial RS-232 or serial RS-485 methods as well as TCP/IP over Ethernet methods, with dependence on the communications specifications of the individual controllers. Communications among controllers and I/O boards in the system shall be via serial RS-485.

3. It shall be possible for system users to define the number of times the host attempts to retry to connect to a controller before the controller is considered offline by the system. The range of times shall be 0-32,767.

4. System integrators shall be able to enable or disable communication to individual I/O boards and select the speed to communication between each. The baud rate of communications among the controllers and I/O boards shall be user-selectable from among the following: 2400; 9600; 19,200; 38,400 and 115,200.

5. The database software shall allow any system transaction or event to globally link to, and actuate, any relay or relay group, device driver, WAV flies, bitmap, alarm group, or any combination of these anywhere in the system. Links assigned to specific cards are viewable on a card-by-card basis.

6. Downloading: System administrators or other authorized users shall be capable of downloading any selected or all system setup parameters and databases to any selected or all system controllers. The system software shall indicate when any download is complete.

7. System Security and User Rights: For each application-level user of the system, it shall be possible for the administrator to define the user name, enter the full first and last names of the user, define a password, and enter an e-mail address. It shall also be possible to establish activation and expiration dates for the user account in the system. Passwords permissible for use in the software shall conform to default Windows® requirements. It shall also be possible for the administrator to use the network user

28 13 00 - 7


names and passwords of LDAP users. 8. User Interface: The User Interface shall incorporate a menu bar with drop-down menus

and display icons for full system setup and operation. This menu and these icons shall offer to system users complete access on one screen to all system functions and system setup parameters to which the users have rights. Users shall be able to design, store and display multiple, individually created screens used to display cardholder information and data. The system shall support an unlimited number of operator defined screen layouts that shall accommodate the data fields in the system. The system shall additionally be built and delivered with a standard, ready-to-use data-entry screen. This product standard screen shall be modifiable by the operator and saved under a new screen name.

9. General Software, GMT & Time: It shall be possible to retrieve the system time of a host and store it within the controller. Users shall be able to assign local and daylight saving time offsets from GMT for use within the system. For transaction logging, the controller shall use the host's system time, which has been synchronized with the GMT. The controller shall use this local time, with an optional daylight savings offset, for schedules and time zones.

10. Access Levels & Groups: It shall be possible to establish up to 32 access levels per cardholder that designate the permissible readers that cardholders may use and the time zones, or schedules, during which they may be used. By defining the permissible readers, the areas to which each cardholder has access rights shall thereby be defined. This definition of access rights in the system shall allow access to any cardholder if a particular time zone is active at a particular reader, that reader is part of the access level, and all other access-rights tests prove valid for that cardholder.

11. Card Formats: Users shall be able to select ABA and Wiegand reader and card formats. Up to eight card formats shall be selectable per reader. These card data formatting capabilities shall allow the use of different reader technologies without modification to the software. This system shall utilize proximity readers.

12. Alarm Acknowledgements: The software shall provide for alarm management capabilities. It shall be possible to set up any system transaction or event to require alarm acknowledgement. The system shall provide user-defined alarm-handling capabilities to include easy-to-use interfaces to create alarm acknowledgement alert messages, acknowledgment response options and priority parameters, and password and comment requirements. Alarm management shall also provide for disabling alarm acknowledgement on the system.

13. Triggers and Procedures: The software shall provide customizable means by which users can choose an event in the system to trigger an action that the system takes in response to the event or to be associated with the event. These triggers and procedures shall provide a means for event-based control as opposed to solely time-based control, although the starting and ending of time zones can be used as triggers. It shall be possible to choose any system transaction as a trigger. It shall be equally possible, through the use of user levels as described in this specification, to use any card-generated transaction, any action or any system event as a trigger.

C. Access Control System Infrastructure:

1. Access Control System Wire and Cable as specified in Section 28 05 00.

D. Access Control System Remote Devices 1. Client Workstation

a. Client workstation shall communicate with the Server via the District’s WAN. b. Client workstation shall be IBM compatible, and shall run on Windows XP. c. Client workstation shall utilize the IDenticard PremiSys software using the

Districts existing licenses. d. Shall be furnished by the District.

28 13 00 - 8


e. The client will be loaded on 2 workstations at High Schools. No other sites will receive clients installed by the contractor.

2. Door Control Panel: a. Shall be a programmable smart panel, which controls all access control

equipment locally within a school. b. Shall be capable of controlling all card reader doors and connected equipment. c. Shall make intelligent access control decisions locally, without requiring

verification to the Server. d. Shall have on board memory for operation as a stand-alone panel if

communications are lost with the Host PC. e. Shall be located in the school MDF / IDF rooms, as indicated in the drawings

using Identicards Large enclosure. f. Shall be PremiSys Panel. g. All Identicard boards shall be housed in a powder-coated heavy-gauge steel

enclosure provided by Identicard with a hinged front door, cam lock and tamper switch.

h. Shall be provided with a 4-hour – 5-minute battery standby system. 3. Network Card

a. The network card shall allow communication between a system Server and a controller to be conducted over an Ethernet network. The network card shall be sufficiently small to plug into a socket on the controller and shall convert, in two directions, the serial communications among the controllers and boards to TCP/IP communications between the controller and the system host PC.

b. The network card shall be assigned an IP address and shall be programmed using a software application separate from the access-control system software. All necessary settings in the card shall be configurable using only this software, and no hardware settings made via jumpers, DIP switches and the like shall be necessary.

c. The network card shall incorporate a RJ-45 (10Base-T) Ethernet connector for the host-controller communications as well as indicator lights to verify card function and to permit card diagnostics.

d. The network card shall be powered by the controller into which it is plugged. 4. Two Reader IO Board:

a. The two-reader board shall be connected to a system controller and act as an interface between this controller and any of a variety of readers that can read ABA-formatted data or Wiegand®-formatted data from proximity cards. The board shall also be capable of supporting tri-stated LED control and buzzer control.

b. The two-reader board shall support up to two (2) reading devices of the same or different technologies, the type being selectable through the application software. Systems that are unable to use readers of different technologies on the same board or require a change in software, firmware or "other" interface devices shall be unacceptable.

c. The two-reader board shall use quick-disconnect terminal blocks for all interconnections to the interface. The two-reader board shall be intended for use in low voltage, Class 2 circuits only.

d. The two-reader board shall communicate to a controller via a two-wire RS-485 interface, which shall allow multi-drop communication on a single bus of up to 4,000 feet (1,200 m). It shall be possible to connect up to 64 I/O boards, some of which can be two-reader boards, to a single expandable controller described in the specification, or up to 32 I/O boards, all or some of which can be two-reader boards, to a single compact controller described in the specification. All communications lines shall be supervised in the system, and transactions shall be provided in the system to alert the operator of offline or disconnect statuses.

28 13 00 - 9


Provision to set end-of-line (EOL) resistance for the board itself shall be built into the board should this resistance be needed.

e. Each two-reader board shall be uniquely addressable by the user through the settings of a dual in-line package (DIP) switch on the board. In addition, this DIP switch shall be used to select the baud rate of communication with the controller.

f. All input boards shall be housed in a powder-coated heavy-gauge steel enclosure with a hinged front door. Five (5) conduit knockouts shall be available on two sides of the enclosure and on its back.

g. The two-reader board shall provide sensor monitoring via its eight (8) supervised inputs, which can be used as door-position inputs, request-to-exit inputs and for other purposes. The states of the inputs shall be as follows: normally open; normally closed; 1 K normal, 2 K active; and 2 K normal, 1 K active. It additionally shall be possible to set the debounce and hold times for each input on the board. It shall be possible to set all input configuration via the system software.

h. It shall be possible via the system software to link any input or relay on the two-reader board to cause an action on any other relay on the same board or on any other system boards and to select the action that the linked relay will take when the triggering input or relay is activated. The inputs shall be configurable to use or not to use end-of- line (EOL) resistors for normally open or normally closed contacts.

i. The two-reader board shall also provide six Form-C, noninductive contact relays with ratings of 5 A at 28 VDC for optional use in controlling door locks, alarm signals or other devices. Control of the relays shall be software-assignable to be triggered by a reading device, cardholder, time zone and/or other system actions. The relays shall be configurable for normal (relay energized when “on”) or inverted (relay de-energized when “on”) action. Pulse time of a relay used as a door-lock relay shall be software-selectable between 1 and 255 seconds.

5. Remote Input Board a. The input board shall be connected to a system controller and provide sensor

monitoring and output control via its 16 supervised inputs. The states of the inputs shall be as follows: normally open; normally closed; 1 K normal, 2 K active; and 2 K normal, 1 K active. It additionally shall be possible to set the debounce and hold times for each input on the board. Each input point shall have a corresponding LED on the board that indicates the state of the point.

b. The input board shall also provide two Form-C contact relays for optional use in controlling door strikes or other devices. Control of the relays shall be software-assignable to be triggered by system actions. Pulse time of the relays shall be software-selectable between 1 and 255 seconds, inclusive.

c. It shall be possible via the system software to link any input or relay on the input board to cause an action on any other relay on the same board or on any other system boards and to select the action that the linked relay will take when the triggering input or relay is activated.

d. All interconnections to the interface shall be via quick-disconnect terminal blocks. The input board shall be intended for use in low voltage, Class 2 circuits only.

e. The input board shall communicate to a controller via a two-wire RS-485 interface, which shall allow multi-drop communication on a single bus of up to 4,000 feet (1,200 m). It shall be possible to connect up to 64 I/O boards, all or some of which can be input boards, to a single expandable controller described in the specification, or up to 32 I/O boards, all or some of which can be input boards, to a single compact controller described in the specification. All communications lines shall be supervised in the system, and transactions shall be provided in the system to alert the operator of offline or disconnect statuses.

28 13 00 - 10


Provision to set end-of-line (EOL) resistance for the inputs 1 through 16 and for the board itself shall be built into the board should this resistance be needed.

f. Each input board shall be uniquely addressable by the user through the settings of a dual in-line package (DIP) switch on the board. In addition, this DIP switch shall be used to select the baud rate of communication with the controller.

g. All input boards shall be housed in a powder-coated heavy-gauge steel enclosure provided by Identicard with a hinged front door and cam lock. Five (5) conduit knockouts shall be available on two sides of the enclosure and on its back.

h. The input board shall accept 12 to 24 VDC for power. i. Shall be provided with a 4-hour - 5-minute battery standby system.

6. Remote Output Board: a. The output board shall be connected to a system controller and provide output

control via 16 Form-C, noninductive relays with ratings of 5 A at 28 VDC. The relays shall be configurable for normal (relay energized when “on”) or inverted (relay de-energized when “on”) action. It shall also be possible to define the response desired for each relay when communications are lost between the output board and the controller: The relay shall be active, the relay shall be inactive, or the relay shall maintain its status at the moment communications are lost. Each relay shall have a corresponding LED on the board that indicates when the relay is energized.

b. Control of the relays shall be software-assignable to be triggered by a reading device, cardholder, time zone and/or other system actions. Pulse time of the relays shall be software-selectable between 1 and 255 seconds, inclusive.

c. It shall be possible via the system software to link any relay on the output board to cause an action on any other relay on the same board or on any other system boards and to select the action that the linked relay will take when the triggering relay is activated.

d. All interconnections to the output board shall be via quick-disconnect terminal blocks. The output board shall be intended for use in low voltage, Class 2 circuits only.

e. The output board shall communicate to a controller via a two-wire RS-485 interface, which shall allow multi-drop communication on a single bus of up to 4,000 feet (1,200 m). It shall be possible to connect up to 64 I/O boards, all or some of which can be output boards, to a single expandable controller described in the specification, or up to 32 I/O boards, all or some of which can be output boards, to a single compact controller described in the specification. All communications lines shall be supervised in the system, and transactions shall be provided in the system to alert the operator of offline or disconnect statuses. Provision to set end-of-line (EOL) resistance for the board itself shall be built into the board should this resistance be needed.

f. Each output board shall be uniquely addressable by the user through the settings of a dual in-line package (DIP) switch on the board. In addition, this DIP switch shall be used to select the baud rate of communication with the controller.

g. All output boards shall be housed in a powder-coated heavy-gauge steel enclosure with a hinged front door. Five (5) conduit knockouts shall be available on two sides of the enclosure and on its back.

h. The output board shall accept 12 to 24 VDC for power. i. Shall be provided with a 4-hour - 5-minute battery standby system.

7. Power Supply: a. Auxiliary power supply shall be installed in conjunction with the door control

panel(s), to provide dedicated low voltage power for the electronic door locks and other peripheral devices such as motion detectors.

28 13 00 - 11


b. Shall be voltage selectable for either 12 or 24 VDC and shall be minimum 4 Amp output.

c. Shall be a separate power supply, set to 24vDC, for the electronic door hardware.

d. Shall be a separate power supply, set to 24vDC, for the ACS electronic devices. e. Shall be installed such that there is a minimum 25 % spare load capacity under

worst case operating conditions. f. Shall be located at panel locations, as indicated on the drawings. g. Shall be provided with a 4-hour – 5-minute battery standby system. h. Shall be manufactured by Securitron, or District approved equal. i. Shall be monitored by the ACS for AC fail and low battery.

8. Card Reader: a. Shall be proximity type, Weigand format card reader. b. Shall communicate with the local door control panel. c. Shall have operating range of 4-inches. d. Shall be installed at 48-inches to center AFF. e. Shall be the proper model and type, to function correctly with the specific door

and back box. f. Shall be a manufactured by AWID, or District approved equal.

9. Door Lock: a. Shall be 24vDC low voltage electronic door lock. b. Shall be wired to the local door control panel. c. Shall be provided and installed by the Division 8 Door hardware Supplier. d. Shall be surface mounted fail secure electric strike, electrified panic bar w/hex

key dogging or electrified lockset with classroom function with keyed cylinders on both sides.

e. Shall be manufactured by HES, or District approved equal depending a specific door hardware used.

f. Coordinate installation with the GC, EC and SC. 10. Request-to-Exit Motion Detector:

a. All card reader doors shall be equipped with request to exit motion detectors. b. Shall be Bosh DS150i in black or white depending on door finishes, or District

approved equal. c. REX shall be located directly above the door header or ceiling looking back into

the space as high as possible within manufactures range requirements. d. Provide enough REX devices at the CAD entry to cover all doors at the entry.

11. Door Position Switch: a. All exterior doors at the access control reader entry / egress locations shall be

equipped with position switches. b. Shall be mounted no less than 6-inches from the door latch. c. For in-jamb applications, the door position switch shall be Sentrol 1078-W wide

gap for steel doors, or District approved equal. Magnets in door channel top shall be rtv secured in place to avoid shifting.

d. For surface mount applications, the door position switch shall be Sentrol 2505A wide gap type with armored cable, or District approved equal.

12. Security Key Pad: a. Provide remote security keypad where indicated on the drawings. Typically there

will be one keypad located in the Building Engineer’s office. b. Shall contain integral alphanumeric keypad with symbols arranged in ascending

ASCII code ordinal sequence. c. Shall have a contact output and shall interface with the Identicard panel I / O

equipment. d. Shall be Vista 6160.

13. Proximity Cards:

28 13 00 - 12


a. Shall be proximity type, weigand format, fully compatible with the local door control panel.

b. Shall be furnished by the District. 14. Wireless Transmitter / Receiver:

a. Shall be Inovonics 902-928 MHz EchoStream . b. Transmitter shall be single channel, EN1215EOL, or District approved equal. c. Receiver shall be four zone EN4204R with 4 relays, or District approved equal. d. Contractor shall field locate the wireless receiver, such that proper reception of

the wireless transmitter signal is achieved and the LEDs are visible from floor level and never hidden above ceilings or equipment.

15. Protective Device Wire Guards: a. Shall be provided in any area where damage is likely to occur. They are required

in Gyms, Locker and Weight rooms b. Device wire guards shall be UL Listed for the specific device and installation

application.

E. Security Lockdown (Duress) Button: 1. Shall be a latching push-button type. Each site will receive both switches at the listed

locations below. 2. One button shall be hardwire type in the MDF Room, mounted at 48-inch AFF to the

center of the box. 3. One button shall be wireless type switch in the Main Office area, mounted in a concealed

location under the principal secretary’s desk at least 4 inches from the face of the desk. 4. Shall be USP-HUB2B switch with an Inovonics wireless transmitter.

F. Security, Card Access Interface Relay Board: 1. Vista Relay Module #4202: For interface of voice annunciation to paging system through

access control system and Vista Security. a. Relay #1 – Arm Disarm status to CA PremiSys input point b. Relay #2 – Arm message to Elk 124 message #2 c. Relay #3 – Alarm message to Elk 124 message #3

G. Voice Annunciator: 1. Elk 124-V2, eight channel voice record/playback annunciator, capable of recording and

playing back eight different messages. Each message shall be able to be up to 90 seconds long. The unit shall have an integrated microphone, record pushbutton, and playback volume control.

a. Message #1 – Lockdown Massage triggered from PremiSys relay.“The school is in a Lockdown, Please stand by for further instructions.” Repeats 3 times

b. Message #2 – Arm message from Vista 4204 relay #2. “The security system is arming please exit the building or contact District Security” Repeats 3 times.

c. Relay #3 – Alarm message to from Vista 4204 relay #3. “The security system has been activated please contact District Security” Follows Vista Bell timeout settings and retriggers on each alarm.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

28 13 00 - 13


B. Install wiring in plenum rated cable. Cable routing shall be perpendicular to or parallel to structural building members, and shall utilize a metal bridal ring type support system attached to structural building members only. Mounting cable to other building systems (fires protection, electrical conduit, mechanical ductwork, etc.), or running cable in any fashion other than described, is strictly forbidden. See Section 3.02 for additional open cable requirements.

C. Mount end-of-line device in box with last device.

D. Make conduit and wiring connections to door strike devices and other applicable devices, furnished under other Sections.

E. Label each device as specified in 28 05 00.

F. All device drops will be provided with a 10 foot service loop located directly above the device on the last bridal ring of the wire run.

G. All panels will have panduit between each panel and to a height of 7 feet. Refer to DCAD and MDF\IDF layout for details on enclosure placement and spacing.

H. All exposed cabling will be routed through panduit, conduit or plastic Wiremold©, and shall be secured with a minimum of 1 strap or screw attachment per segment and every 2 feet. Provide manufactures joint, corner, caps and finish pieces as needed to make a complete cable path. Glue all joint, corners, caps and finish pieces in place using RTV.

I. No penetrations shall be made on the bottom of any enclosure. This space shall be used for batteries. All enclosure penetrations will have bushings with strain relief. Do not use romex connectors.

3.02 OPEN (Plenum) CABLE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Open cabling shall be installed as specified in Section 28 05 00.


A. Test in accordance with manufacturer’s recommended testing practices.

B. Provide forty-eight (48) hours notice to the Engineer and District personnel for rough inspection, prior to installing ceiling tiles or drywall.

C. Provide seven (7) day prior notice to the Engineer and District personnel for scheduled contractor pre-testing of the system.

D. Provide three (3) day prior notice to the Engineer and District personnel for the scheduled final commissioning Owner testing of the system.

E. Provide two (2) detailed records of the pre-testing of the system. One copy for the District and one for the facility’s System logbook. Pre-testing record must contain a minimum of the device ID, proper functionality of the device (door unlock, card read, etc.), and date of the testing. Submit suggested Contractor testing form for approval by the District in advance of the system pre-test.

F. Provide a Security Device Location Map in AutoCad© dwg file format and a hard copy PDF print. Map must include the site plan, floor plan with room #s, true device locations and field labels of all Cameras, CAD and Motion detection devices only.

28 13 00 - 14


3.04 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES

A. Prepare and start systems.

B. Include services of a Factory-certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, and system testing.

C. Provide two (2) hard copies and two (2) electronic copies in CD ROM or flash drive format of the final system programming and Security Device Location Map. One set to be delivered to the District Project Manager for the District Central Reporting System programming, and one set to be left inside the facility’s card access panel back box.

3.05 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses to each.

3.06 TRAINING

A. Provide the services of a factory-certified service representative to demonstrate the system and train Owner’s maintenance personnel as specified below:

1. On-Site Training: Provide a minimum of two (2) hours of on-site training of the facility’s

school staffing in the basic operations and functionality of the access control / security system panel, and field devices. Review field panel locations, typically device locations, and 120vAC power locations (panels, breakers, and circuits). Demonstrate the various system responses to the field off-normal conditions. Simulate card access conditions, supervisory conditions, security conditions, trouble conditions, and ground fault conditions of the various field devices. Provide written instructions of basic system operating instructions in the Card Access System Logbook, located adjacent to the access control-panel.

2. Off-Site Training: Provide a minimum of two (2) hours of off-site training of the District’s maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in operating, troubleshooting, servicing, programming, and preventative maintenance of a system. The off-site training shall be conducted in a classroom type setting, with the content approved by the District in advance. Provide maintenance, service, and programming manuals of the various components of the system. Provide a working (panel and field devices) system demonstration unit; whereby the various system troubleshooting and servicing procedures can be adequately performed in a “hands-on” scenario.

B. On-Site System Training shall be completed within six (6) days of completion of the system and final system commissioning test. Off-Site System Training shall be completed within thirty (30) days of completion of the system, unless the District specifically directs an alternate training schedule.

C. Schedule On-Site Training with the District at least three (3) days in advance. Schedule Off-Site Training with the District at least fourteen (14) days in advance.

END OF SECTION

JEFFCO PUBLIC SCHOOLSKITCHEN DOOR REPLACEMENT

SCHOOL SIZE TYPE MAT FINISH SWING TYPE MAT FINISH HEAD JAMB JAMB SILL REMARKS HARDWAREAdams ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- 1/A1 1/A1 --- 1 1, (2)6

Allendale ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- 1/A1 1/A1 --- 1 2Arvada K-8 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 2Belmar ES 3'-0" X 6'-8" A & B H M PNT 2 H1 H M PNT 7/A4 8/A4 8/A4 2/A1 2 8 3 4

DOOR FRAMES

Belmar ES 3 0 X 6 8 A & B H.M. PNT 2 H1 H.M. PNT 7/A4 8/A4 8/A4 2/A1 2,8 3,4Bergen Meadow ES PR 3'-0" X 6'-9" D H.M. PNT 3 --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 3,8 5Bergen Valley ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 4,7,8 (2)2,6

Blue Heron ES --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 8 1Bradford Intermediate 3'-8" X 7'-0" B H.M. PNT 5 H9 H.M. PNT 11/A6 12/A6 12/A6 5/A3 6,11 4

Bradford Primary 3'-8" X 7'-0" B H.M. PNT 6 --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 3,4,8 4C b ll ES 3' 0" X 6' 8" A & B H M PNT 2 H1 H M PNT 7/A4 8/A4 8/A4 2/A1 2 8 3 4Campbell ES 3'-0" X 6'-8" A & B H.M. PNT 2 H1 H.M. PNT 7/A4 8/A4 8/A4 2/A1 2,8 3,4Carmody MS PR 3'-0" X 7'-2" A H.M. PNT 3 H1 H.M. PNT 6/A3SIM. 6/A3 6/A3 2/A1 2,8 5

Columbine Hills ES 3'-6" X 7'-2" E & B H.M. PNT 1 H1 H.M. PNT 3/A2 4/A2 4/A2 2/A1 2 3,4Creighton MS 3'-6" X 7'-0" B H.M. PNT 7 --- --- PNT --- --- --- 5/A3 4 4

Deane ES 3'-0" X 6'-8" E & B H.M. PNT 9 H1 H.M. PNT 7/A4 8/A4 8/A4 2/A1 2 3,4Deer Creek MS --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- 1/A1 1/A1 --- 1 (2)6Dutch Creek ES 3'-7" X 7'-0" A & B H.M. PNT 2 H1 H.M. PNT 9/A5 8/A4 8/A4 2/A1 2,8 3,4Edgewater ES 3'-0" X 6'-8" B H.M. PNT 8 --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 4 4

Eiber ES 3'-0" X 7'-1" E & B H.M. PNT 1 H1 H.M. PNT 7/A4 8/A4 8/A4 2/A1 2 3,4Elk Creek ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 4,11 2,6

Falcon Bluffs MS --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- 1/A1 --- --- 1 ---Fitzmorris ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- --- 2Foothills ES 3'-0 1/2" X 6'-11" B H.M. PNT 8 H1 H.M. PNT 11/A6 12/A6 12/A6 5/A3 6 2,4Foster ES 3'-0" X 7'-0" E & B H.M. PNT 9 H2 H.M. PNT 3/A2 4/A2 4/A2 2/A1 2 3,4

Fremont ES 3'-0" X 7'-0" A & B H.M. PNT 1 H1 H.M. PNT 3/A2 4/A2 4/A2 2/A1 2,8 3,4Glennon Heights ES 3'-0" X 7'-0" B H.M. PNT 7 H1 H.M. PNT 11/A6 12/A6 12/A6 5/A3 6,8 1,2,4,6

Governor's Ranch ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- 1/A1 1/A1 --- 1,8,11 (2) 2Green Mountain ES 3'-6" X 6'-8" E & B H M PNT 2 H1 H M PNT 7/A4 8/A4 8/A4 2/A1 2 3 4Green Mountain ES 3 -6 X 6 -8 E & B H.M. PNT 2 H1 H.M. PNT 7/A4 8/A4 8/A4 2/A1 2 3,4Hackberry Hill ES 3'-6" X 7'-0" B H.M. PNT 8 H3 H.M. PNT 11/A6 12/A6 12/A6 5/A3 6,8 4

Hutchinson ES 3'-6" X 7'-0" A & B H.M. PNT 2 H1 H.M. PNT 11/A6 12/A6 12/A6 5/A3 3,6,8 3,4Kendallvue ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- 1/A1 1/A1 --- 1,8,11 1,2

Kendrick Lakes ES 3'-0" X 6'-8" A & B H.M. PNT 2 H1 H.M. PNT 3/A2 4/A2 4/A2 2/A1 2,8 3,4Kullerstrand ES 3'-6" X 6'-8" E & B H.M. PNT 2 H1 H.M. PNT 7/A4 8/A4 8/A4 2/A1 2,10 3,4

L l ES PNT PNT 8 10Lasley ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 8,10 ---Lawrence ES 3'-6" X 7'-0" B H.M. PNT 8 H4 H.M. PNT 11/A6 12/A6 12/A6 5/A3 6 4

Lukas ES 3'-8" X 7'-0" A & B H.M. PNT 1 H2 H.M. PNT 3/A2 4/A2 4/A2 2/A1 2,8 3,4Lumberg ES 3'-0" X 7'-0" B H.M. PNT 9 H1 H.M. PNT 11/A6 12/A6 12/A6 5/A3 6 4Mandalay MS --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 8 (2) 2

Maple Grove ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 4 6

1 of 3 4/1/13


SCHOOL SIZE TYPE MAT FINISH SWING TYPE MAT FINISH HEAD JAMB JAMB SILL REMARKS HARDWAREDOOR FRAMES

Marshdale ES 3'-6" X 7'-10" B H.M. PNT 6 --- --- PNT --- --- --- 2/A1 5,9 (2) 2,7Meiklejohn ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 4 6

Mitchell ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 4,11,15 6,7Moore MS --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- 1/A1 1/A1 --- 1 8 14 1Moore MS PNT PNT 1/A1 1/A1 1,8,14 1

Mortensen ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 8 (2) 2,7Mount Carbon ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- --- 2

Normandy ES 3'-0" X 7'-0" B H.M. PNT 5 H5 H.M. PNT 11/A6 12/A6 12/A6 5/A3 6 2,4North Arvada MS 3'-4" X 7'-0" B H.M. PNT 8 H1 H.M. PNT 11/A6 12/A6 12/A6 5/A3 6,7 3,4

Oberon MS PR 3'-0" X 6'-8" D H.M. PNT 3 --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 3 5O'C ll MS 3' 6" X 7' 10" A & B H M PNT 1 H6 H M PNT 3/A2 8/A4 8/A4 2/A1 2 8 3 4O'Connell MS 3'-6" X 7'-10" A & B H.M. PNT 1 H6 H.M. PNT 3/A2 8/A4 8/A4 2/A1 2,8 3,4Parmalee ES 4'-0" X 6'-8" A & B H.M. PNT 2 H1 H.M. PNT 7/A4 8/A4 8/A4 2/A1 2,8 3,4

Parr ES 3'-0" X 6'-8" A & B H.M. PNT 1 H1 H.M. PNT 10/A5 10/A5 10/A5 2/A1 2,8 3,4Patterson ES 4'-0" X 7'-9" A & B H.M. PNT 1 H7 H.M. PNT 13/A7 4/A2 4/A2 2/A1 2,8 3,4

Peiffer ES 3'-6" X 7'-0" B H.M. PNT 5 H4 H.M. PNT 11/A6 12/A6 12/A6 5/A3 6 2,4Pennington ES 3'-0" X 7'-0" A & B H.M. PNT 9 H1 H.M. PNT 11/A6 12/A6 12/A6 5/A3 3,6,8 3,4Powderhorn ES 3'-6" X 7'-0" B H.M. PNT 6 --- --- PNT --- --- --- 5/A3 4,8 4

Prospect Valley ES 3'-6" X 7'-0" B H.M. PNT 5 H8 H.M. PNT 7/A4 8/A4 4/A2 5/A3 6 1,2,4Red Rocks ES 3'-0" X 6'-6" B H.M. PNT 8 H1 H.M. PNT 11/A6 12/A6 12/A6 5/A3 6 4

Rooney Ranch ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 10 ---Ryan ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 11 ---

Semper ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 4,7,11 6pShelton ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 14 2

Sheridan Green ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 4,7,11 (2)2,(2)6,7Sierra ES 4'-0" X 7'-0 1/2" B H.M. PNT 5 H4 H.M. PNT --- --- --- 5/A3 4,7 4

South Lakewood ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- --- 2Stein ES 3'-8" X 6'-8" C H.M. PNT 4 H10 H.M. PNT 6/A3SIM. 6/A3 6/A3 2/A1 2 3

Stevens ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- --- ---Stevens ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- --- ---Stober ES 3'-6" X 7'-10" C H.M. PNT 4 --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 3 3

Stony Creek ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 8,11 (2) 2Stott ES 3'-0" X 6'-8" B H.M. PNT 5 H1 H.M. PNT 11/A6SIM. 12/A6SIM. 12/A6SIM. 5/A3 6,7,8 3,4

Summit Ridge MS --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 4,7,8,9 (2)2,(2)6Swanson ES 3'-0" X 6'-8" E & B H.M. PNT 1 H11 H.M. PNT 3/A2 4/A2 4/A2 2/A1 2 3,4Th ES PNT PNT 11Thomson ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 11 ---

Ute Meadows ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- 1/A1 1/A1 --- 1,11 (2) 2,7Van Arsdale ES PR 3'-0" X 7'-0" B H.M. PNT 11 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 5 (2) 2,5

Vivian ES 3'-6" X 7'-0" B H.M. PNT 6 H1 H.M. PNT 11/A6 12/A6 12/A6 5/A3 6 4Warder ES 3'-6" X 7'-0" A & B H.M. PNT 9 H1 H.M. PNT 10/A5 8/A4 8/A4 2/A1 2,8 3,4

Warren Tech PR 3'-10"X 7'-2" B H.M. PNT 12 H1 H.M. PNT 6/A3SIM. 6/A3 6/A3 2/A1 12,13 5

2 of 3 4/1/13


SCHOOL SIZE TYPE MAT FINISH SWING TYPE MAT FINISH HEAD JAMB JAMB SILL REMARKS HARDWAREDOOR FRAMES

Welchester ES PR 3'-0" X 6'-8" D H.M. PNT 3 H1 H.M. PNT 6/A3SIM. 6/A3 6/A3 2/A1 2 5West Jefferson ES 3'-0" X 7'-10" A & B H.M. PNT 2 H1 H.M. PNT 7/A4 8/A4 8/A4 2/A1 2,8 3,4West Jefferson MS 3'-0" X 7'-0" A & B H.M. PNT 2 H4 H.M. PNT 3/A2 4/A2 4/A2 2/A1 2,8 3,4

Westridge ES 3'-8" X 7'-10" B H M PNT 7 --- --- PNT --- --- --- --- 5 1 (2) 2Westridge ES 3 8 X 7 10 B H.M. PNT 7 PNT 5 1,(2) 2West Woods ES --- --- --- PNT --- --- --- PNT --- 1/A1 1/A1 --- 1,7 2,6

Wilmore-Davis ES 3'-0" X 6'-8" B H.M. PNT 10 H1 H.M. PNT 11/A6 12/A6 12/A6 5/A3 6,7 2,4,6Wilmot ES 4'-0" X 6'-8" A & B H.M. PNT 9 H1 H.M. PNT 7/A4 8/A4 8/A4 2/A1 2,8,10 3,4

Witt ES 3'-8" X 7'-10" A & B H.M. PNT 1 H1 H.M. PNT 3/A2 4/A2 4/A2 2/A1 2,8 3,4

DOOR SCHEDULE ABBREV'SDOOR SCHEDULE NOTES DOOR SCHEDULE ABBREV'S.ALUM ALUMINUMFF FACTORY FINISH

2. EXISTING DOORS AND FRAME TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED WITH NEW MAT MATERIALPNT PAINT

3. REPLACE EXISTING H.M. DOOR(S) WITH NEW DOOR(S) AND HARDWARE. PR PAIR

DOOR SCHEDULE NOTES1. RUSTED FRAMES AT DOOR JAMBS TO BE REPAIRED PER DETAIL. FIELD VERIFY EXACT PROFILE TO MATCH.

H.M. FRAME AND TWO (2) H.M. DOORS. (ONLY ONE DOOR AT STEIN ES)( ) ( )

(2) INDICATES QUANTITYOF TWO

SCREEN DOOR WITH H M FRAME WELDED TO EXISTING FRAME (EXIST SCREEN MAY NOT EXIST)

5. REPLACE EXISTING H.M. DOOR(S) WITH NEW DOOR(S). REUSE EXISTING HARDWARE. 6. REMOVE EXISTING WOOD SCREEN DOOR AND FRAME AND REPLACE WITH NEW H.M.

4. THE EXISTING FRAME MUST BE MODIFIED TO ACCOMMODATE NEW HARDWARE. VERIFY THAT THE NEW HARDWARE FITS WITHIN THE EXISTING FRAME AND IS OFFSET FROM THE HARDWARE FOR THE OTHER DOOR IF NECESSARY.

SCREEN DOOR WITH H.M. FRAME WELDED TO EXISTING FRAME. (EXIST. SCREEN MAY NOT EXIST)

FIELD VERIFY EXACT SIZE OF EXISTING OPENINGS TO BE COVERED11. PROVIDE AND INSTALL A NEW EXPANDED METAL COVERING AT EXISTING WINDOW(S).

7. REPLACE EXISTING HARDWARE ON EXISTING H.M. DOOR(S).8. ADD A NEW PEEP HOLE IN EXISTING OR NEW FULL FLUSH DOOR. 9. UNDERCUT THE EXISTING DOOR AS REQUIRED AND REINSTALL SWEEP.10. PROVIDE AND INSTALL A NEW DOOR BELL; MODEL #WD1140A BY IQ AMERICA.

FIELD VERIFY EXACT SIZE OF EXISTING OPENINGS TO BE COVERED.

AND H.M. FRAME.13. REPLACE TWO EXISTING LOUVERS IN EXISTING DOORS WITH NEW GLASS WINDOW UNITS.14. PROVIDE NEW INSECT SCREEN AT EXISTING SCREEN DOOR OPENINGS.15. REPLACE GLASS IN EXISTING WINDOWS WITH NEW SCREENS TO MATCH DOOR TYPE 'B'.

12. REPLACE EXISTING WOOD SCREEN DOOR AND FRAME WITH NEW H.M. SCREEN DOOR

3 of 3 4/1/13

1 Work Description

JEFFCO PUBLIC SCHOOLS KITCHEN DOOR REPLACEMENT

WORK DESCRIPTION

General Notes - Verify and locate all utilities and fixtures prior to demolition and construction. - Maintain proper fire, dust and weather protection during all phases of demolition and construction. - Protect all surrounding surfaces for minimal impact. Any damages must be repaired and patched to match surrounding surfaces. - Field verify existing opening, door or frame for size, materials and conditions prior to ordering or installing new materials. - Any existing items or fixtures to be reused that are located on a frame or door to be removed shall be removed and protected and reinstalled in the same condition it was prior to construction. - Any holes caused by the removal of existing hardware or fixtures in existing doors and frames will need to be patched and repaired if the existing door is to remain in place. - When painting existing or new doors and frames, allow for two colors total per school. Colors will be selected by the Owner. - Salvage all old hardware to the Owner. Give the hardware to the facility manager at each school for storage. - At the doors where existing mortised hardware is to be replaced with new hardware, provide a new wrap-around stainless steel plate 4-2-CW. - Any questions or discrepancies regarding demolition shall be brought to the Owner's and Architect's attention immediately. Adams Elementary School - Repair the rusted door jambs at the bottom. - Add a closer to the full flush hollow metal door. - Replace the existing locksets for both doors with new locksets. - Repaint both hollow metal doors and frame.

Allendale Elementary School - Repair the rusted door jambs at the bottom. - Repaint both hollow metal doors and frame. - Add an armor plate to the outside face of the screen door.

Arvada K-8 School - Add an armor plate to the inside face of the screen door.

2 Work Description

Belmar Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door and frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button. - Fill in the existing hole in the floor where the existing closer used to be with grout. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door.

Bergen Meadow Elementary School - Remove and replace existing pair of doors with new doors. Provide new hardware and reuse the existing card reader, door position switch, motion sensor and power supply. Reuse the existing frame and protect. - Paint the new doors and existing frame. - Provide new peep hole.

Bergen Valley Elementary School - Remove existing pulls and dead bolt in existing screen door. - Prep existing frame as necessary for new hardware for screen door. - Provide new lockset for screen door. - Provide connection to card reader per specifications. - Provide a peep hole in existing full flush hollow metal door. - Repaint both doors and frame. - Add armor plate to outside of full flush door and inside face of screen door.

3 Work Description

Blue Heron Elementary School - Add a closer to the existing screen door. - Add a peep hole to the existing full flush door. Bradford Intermediate School - Remove existing wood screen door and frame. - Provide a new hollow metal screen door with a new partial frame welded to the existing to allow for proper clearance between the existing door and new screen door. Provide new hardware for new door. - Provide a new expanded metal cover over the existing opening in the existing exterior hollow metal door. - Repaint both doors and frame.

Bradford Primary School - Remove and replace the existing screen door with a new hollow metal screen door and new hardware. - Prep existing frame as necessary for new hardware for screen door. - Add a peep hole to the existing full flush door. - Paint both new and existing doors and frame.

Campbell Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door and frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door.

4 Work Description

Carmody Middle School - Remove and replace existing pair of doors and frame with new doors and frame. Provide new hardware and reuse the existing card reader, door position switch, motion sensor and power supply. - Paint the new doors and frame.

Columbine Hills Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door and frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button.

Creighton Middle School - Install a new hollow metal screen door in the existing hollow metal frame. - Prep existing frame as necessary for new hardware for screen door. - Existing hollow metal frame must be prepped for new hinges for screen door. - Connect new screen door to security and card reader systems. - Paint both doors and frame.

5 Work Description

Deane Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door and frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button.

Deer Creek Middle School - Repair the rusted door jambs at the bottom. - Repaint both hollow metal doors and frame, including louver above door. - Replace locksets in both doors with new locksets.

Dutch Creek Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door and frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door.

6 Work Description

Edgewater Elementary School - Remove the existing screen door and frame. - Install a new hollow metal screen door in the existing hollow metal frame. - Prep existing frame as necessary for new hardware for screen door. - Existing hollow metal frame must be prepped for new hinges for screen door. - Connect new screen door to security and card reader systems. - Paint both doors and frame.

Eiber Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door and frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button.

Elk Creek Elementary School - Provide new expanded metal covers to the screen opening in the screen door. - Remove existing dead bolt in existing screen door. - Prep existing frame as necessary for new hardware for screen door. - Provide new lockset for screen door. - Provide connection to card reader per specifications. - Add an armor plate to the inside face of the outside door. - Repaint both doors and frame.

7 Work Description

Falcon Bluffs Middle School - Repair the rusted door jamb at the bottom. - Repaint both hollow metal doors and frame. - Repair or replace the existing door stop at the exterior door.

Fitzmorris Elementary School - Caulk the inside joints of the hollow metal door frame. - Provide new armor plate for the outside face of the screen door. - Repaint both doors and frame. Foothills Elementary School - Remove existing wood screen door and frame. - Provide a new hollow metal screen door with a new partial frame welded to the existing to allow for proper clearance between the existing door and new screen door. Provide new hardware for new door. - Provide a new armor plate for the inside face of the outside door. - Paint both doors and frame.

Foster Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door and frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button.

8 Work Description

Fremont Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door and frame. - Relocate the existing exit sign to an approved location. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door.

Glennon Heights Elementary School - Remove existing screen door and frame. - Provide a new hollow metal screen door with a new partial frame welded to the existing to allow for proper clearance between the existing door and new screen door. Provide new hardware for new door. - Provide a new armor plate for the outside face of the inside door. - Provide a peep hole for the existing door. - Replace the existing lockset and closer for the existing door with a new lockset and closer. - Paint both doors and frame.

Governor's Ranch Elementary School - Repair the rusted door jambs at the bottom. - Repaint both hollow metal doors and frame. - Add an armor plate to the inside face of the screen door and the outside face of the inside door. - Add a peep hole to the full flush door. - Provide an expanded metal cover to the existing screen opening in the screen door.

9 Work Description

Green Mountain Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door and frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button.

Hackberry Hill Elementary School\ - Remove existing wood screen door and frame. - Move the existing exit sign up two inches. - Provide a new hollow metal screen door with a new partial frame welded to the existing to allow for proper clearance between the existing door and new screen door. Provide new hardware for new door. - Add a peep hole in the existing door. - Paint both doors and frame and exterior flashing just above door.

Hutchinson Elementary School - Remove existing wood screen door and frame. - Provide a new hollow metal screen door with a new partial frame welded to the existing to allow for proper clearance between the existing door and new screen door. Provide new hardware for new door. - Remove and replace the existing full flush hollow metal door with a new door and new hardware. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door. - Paint both doors and frame.

10 Work Description

Kendallvue Elementary School - Repair the rusted door jambs at the bottom. - Repaint both hollow metal doors and frame. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door. - Provide and install a new closer for the full flush door. - Provide an expanded metal cover to the existing screen opening in the screen door. - Add an armor plate to the inside face of the screen door.

Kendrick Lakes Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door.

Kullerstrand Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door and frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, and power supply. - Provide and install a new door bell.

11 Work Description

Lasley Elementary School - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door. - Provide and install a new door bell. - Repaint both doors and frame. Lawrence Elementary School - Provide a new hollow metal screen door with a new partial frame welded to the existing to allow for proper clearance between the existing door and new screen door. Provide new hardware for new door. - Paint both doors and frame.

Lukas Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and hollow metal screen door. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door.

Lumberg Elementary School - Remove existing wood screen door and frame. - Provide a new hollow metal screen door with a new partial frame welded to the existing to allow for proper clearance between the existing door and new screen door. Provide new hardware for new door. - The existing tile base will need to be sawcut to accommodate the new partial frame. - Paint both doors and frame.

12 Work Description

Mandalay Middle School - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door. - Add armor plate to the outside face of the inside door and inside face of the screen door. - Repaint both doors and frame, including louver above door on outside.

Maple Grove Elementary School - Prep existing frame as necessary for new hardware for screen door. - Provide new lockset for screen door. - Provide connection to card reader per specifications. - Paint both doors and frame. Marshdale Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal screen door and replace with a new hollow metal screen door. - Reuse all of the existing hardware. - Replace the existing door stop at the screen door with a new door stop. - Provide new seals for the screen door. - Provide a new threshold. - Undercut the existing full flush door as necessary to clear the threshold. - Provide armor plates for both doors. - Paint both doors and frame, including false door panel on outside.

Meiklejohn Elementary School - Prep existing frame as necessary for new hardware for screen door. - Provide new lockset for screen door. - Provide connection to card reader per specifications. - Move the door bell button to a new location on the outside face of frame. - Provide a new hold open for the main access door. - Repaint both doors and frame.

13 Work Description

Mitchell Elementary School - Prep existing frame as necessary for new hardware for full flush door. - Provide new lockset for existing interior hollow metal door. - Provide connection to card reader per specifications. - Replace glass in exterior door with expanded metal and bug screen per door elevation 'B'. - Repaint both doors and frame. Moore Middle School - Repair the rusted door jambs at the bottom. - Repaint both hollow metal doors and frame. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door. - Provide a new insect screen to fit the existing screen opening. - Replace the existing closer at the screen door with a new closer.

Mortensen Elementary School - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door. - Repaint both hollow metal doors and frame. - Provide new seals and sweep for the screen door. - Provide armor plates for both doors. Mount Carbon Elementary School - Provide armor plate for outside face of screen door. - Repaint both hollow metal doors and frame. Normandy Elementary School - Remove existing wood screen door and frame. - Provide a new hollow metal screen door with a new partial frame welded to the existing to allow for proper clearance between the existing door and new screen door. Provide new hardware for new door. - Provide armor plate for the existing door. - Paint both doors and frame.

14 Work Description

North Arvada Middle School - Remove existing wood screen door and frame. - Provide a new hollow metal screen door with a new partial frame welded to the existing to allow for proper clearance between the existing door and new screen door. Provide new hardware for new door. - Paint both doors and frame. - Remove existing hardware on existing outside door and replace with new hardware.

Oberon Middle School - Remove and replace existing pair of doors with new doors. Provide new hardware and reuse the existing card reader, door position switch, motion sensor and power supply. Reuse the existing frame and protect. - Paint the new doors and existing frame. - Remove the existing wood screen door into the kitchen. Patch and repair the walls and door frame as necessary. Touch up paint at damaged area.

O'Connell Middle School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door.

15 Work Description

Parmalee Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door and frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, and power supply. - Provide and install a new door bell. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door.

Parr Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door and frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, and power supply. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door.

Patterson Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door and frame. - The existing lay-in ceiling will need to be reworked after the new frame is installed. Match existing materials. - The exit sign will need to be removed and reinstalled. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Provide drip flashing at the top of the frame to ensure it is weathertight. Cover the ledge caused by the setback of the wall panel from the outside face of the new hollow metal frame. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button.

16 Work Description

- Provide a peep hole for the full flush door.

Peiffer Elementary School - Provide a new hollow metal screen door with a new partial frame welded to the existing to allow for proper clearance between the existing door and new screen door. Provide new hardware for new door. - Paint both doors and frame. - Provide armor plate for the existing door.

Pennington Elementary School - Remove existing wood screen door and frame. - Provide a new hollow metal screen door with a new partial frame welded to the existing to allow for proper clearance between the existing door and new screen door. Provide new hardware for new door. - Remove and replace the existing full flush hollow metal door with a new door and new hardware. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door. - Paint both doors and frame.

Powderhorn Elementary School - Remove the existing wood screen door and frame. - Install a new hollow metal screen door in the existing hollow metal frame. - Prep existing frame as necessary for new hardware for screen door. - Existing hollow metal frame must be prepped for new hinges for screen door. - Connect new screen door to security and card reader systems. - Paint both doors and frame. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door.

17 Work Description

Prospect Valley Elementary School - Remove existing wood screen door and frame. - Provide a new hollow metal screen door with a new partial frame welded to the existing to allow for proper clearance between the existing door and new screen door. Provide new hardware for new door. - Paint both doors and frame. - Provide a closer and armor plate for the existing hollow metal door.

Red Rocks Elementary School - Provide a new hollow metal screen door with a new partial frame welded to the existing to allow for proper clearance between the existing door and new screen door. Provide new hardware for new door. - Paint both doors and frame.

Rooney Ranch Elementary School - Replace the existing door bell with a new door bell. - Repaint the existing door and frame. Ryan Elementary School - Provide two expanded metal covers to the existing screen openings in the existing doors. - Repaint the existing doors and frame.

18 Work Description

Semper Elementary School - Prep existing frame as necessary for new hardware for screen door. - Provide new lockset for screen door. - Provide connection to card reader per specifications. - Remove existing dead bolt on screen door. - Provide new expanded metal at existing openings in screen door. - Repaint both doors and frame.

Shelton Elementary School - Provide and install a new bug screen in the existing screen door openings. - Provide new armor plate for interior door. - Repaint both doors and frame.

Sheridan Green Elementary School - Prep existing frame as necessary for new hardware for screen door. - Remove and replace hardware for the existing screen door per hardware specifications. - Replace the lockset on the interior hollow metal door with a new lockset. - Provide new weatherstrip for the interior hollow metal door. - Provide new expanded metal at existing opening in screen door. - Repaint both doors and frame. - Provide new armor plates for both doors.

19 Work Description

Sierra Elementary School - Install a new hollow metal screen door in the existing hollow metal frame. - Prep existing frame as necessary for new hardware for screen door. - Existing hollow metal frame must be prepped for new hinges for screen door. - Connect new screen door to security and card reader systems. - Ensure that the existing closer will fit with a new screen door. Provide a new closer or modify as necessary. - Paint both doors and frame.

South Lakewood Elementary School - Provide and install armor plate on the outside face of the inside door. - Paint both doors and frame. Stein Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame. - Provide and install a new hollow metal door, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new door and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button. - The wood framing above the door must also be removed. - Rework the existing ductwork to fit into the new hollow metal frame and louver. - Remove and reinstall all existing electrical wiring above the door as necessary, including the exit sign.

20 Work Description

Stevens Elementary School - Paint both doors and frame. Stober Elementary School - Remove the existing wood screen door and framing. Remove all infill wall above the existing screen door at the existing hollow metal door frame to ceiling elevation. - Replace the existing hollow metal door with a new hollow metal door and new hardware. Protect the existing hollow metal frame. - Patch and repair the interior walls and ceiling as necessary after removing the screen door framing. Paint new wall and ceiling surfaces. - Provide and install a new door bell.

Stony Creek Elementary School - Paint both doors and frame. - Add an armor plate to both faces of the screen door. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door. - Provide new expanded metal at existing opening in screen door.

Stott Elementary School - Remove existing wood screen door and frame. - Provide a new hollow metal screen door with a new partial frame welded to the existing to allow for proper clearance between the existing door and new screen door. Provide new hardware for new door. - Remove the existing hardware for the full flush hollow metal door and replace with new hardware. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door. - Paint both doors and frame.

21 Work Description

Summit Ridge Middle School - Prep existing frame as necessary for new hardware for screen door. - Replace the locksets for both existing doors with new locksets. Remove the existing dead bolt on the existing screen door. - Provide a new peep hole in the existing full flush door, lower than the existing peep hole. Coordinate height with Owner. - Undercut the existing screen door as necessary to clear the door and threshold freely. - Paint both doors and frame. - Provide armor plates for both doors.

Swanson Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door and frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button.

Thomson Elementary School - Provide two new expanded metal covers at existing openings in existing doors. - Paint both doors and frame.

22 Work Description

Ute Meadows Elementary School - Repair the rusted door jambs at the bottom. - Replace the existing armor plate with new armor plate at both doors. - Provide weatherstrip at the screen door. - Provide new expanded metal covering at the screen opening. - Paint both hollow metal doors and frame.

Van Arsdale Elementary School - Replace the pair of existing interior doors with new hollow metal doors with screen openings. - Reuse the existing closers, hinges and armor plate for the new doors. - Provide new locksets and connection to the security system. - Provide a new card reader swipe for the interior doors. - Provide new armor plates for the pair of exterior doors. - Paint all four door leafs and two frames.

Vivian Elementary School - Remove existing wood screen door. - Provide a new hollow metal screen door with a new partial frame welded to the existing to allow for proper clearance between the existing door and new screen door. Provide new hardware for new door. - Paint both doors and frame.

23 Work Description

Warder Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door.

Warren Tech - Remove the existing pair of wood screen doors and frame. - Provide and install a pair of new hollow metal screen doors and hollow metal frame with new hardware. - Replace the two existing louvers in the interior doors with new 1/4" tempered glass to fit the existing openings. Modify or provide a new frame as necessary to allow new windows to be installed. - Paint the new screen doors and frame. - Provide a new card reader and security system for the new screen doors per specifications. Allow for 200 feet of installed wiring to tie into the existing card reader at this school. Tie into the closest power source for the new electric locks. - Provide new hold opens for the existing interior doors.

Welchester Elementary School - Remove the existing pair of wood screen doors and frame. - Remove the existing pair of hollow metal doors and frame and replace with a new pair of hollow metal doors with inset screens and new hollow metal frame with new hardware. - Paint both doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button.

24 Work Description

West Jefferson Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal doors and frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door.

West Jefferson Middle School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door.

Westridge Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal screen door and replace with a new hollow metal screen door. Reuse the existing door hardware. Provide a new closer per the specifications. - Provide new armor plates for both doors. - Paint both doors and frame.

25 Work Description

West Woods Elementary School - Repair the rusted door jambs at the bottom. - Replace the pull and deadbolt hardware at the screen door with a new lockset. - Repaint both hollow metal doors and frame. - Add an armor plate to the outside face of the full flush inside door.

Wilmore-Davis Elementary School - Remove existing wood screen door and frame. - Provide a new hollow metal screen door with a new partial frame welded to the existing to allow for proper clearance between the existing door and new screen door. Provide new hardware for new door. - Replace the existing lockset in the outside door with a new lockset. - Paint both doors and frame. - Add an armor plate to the inside face of the full flush outside door.

Wilmot Elementary School - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame and wood screen door and frame. - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, and power supply. - Provide and install a new door bell. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door.

26 Work Description

Witt Elementary School - Remove the existing wood screen door and frame and patch and repair walls and ceiling as necessary. - Remove the existing hollow metal door and frame (for kitchen door only). - Provide and install new hollow metal doors, frame and new hardware per the door schedule. - Paint the new doors and frame. Include the outside face of four leafs with frame. - Remove and reinstall the existing card reader, motion sensor, door position switch, power supply and door bell button. - Provide a peep hole for the full flush door.